WO2022052760A1 - Combined loudspeaker box configuration method, loudspeaker box, and electronic device - Google Patents

Combined loudspeaker box configuration method, loudspeaker box, and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022052760A1
WO2022052760A1 PCT/CN2021/113271 CN2021113271W WO2022052760A1 WO 2022052760 A1 WO2022052760 A1 WO 2022052760A1 CN 2021113271 W CN2021113271 W CN 2021113271W WO 2022052760 A1 WO2022052760 A1 WO 2022052760A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
speaker
electronic device
sound box
information
interface
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/113271
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
黄剑豪
许剑峰
彭正元
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022052760A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022052760A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04RLOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/20Arrangements for obtaining desired frequency or directional characteristics
    • H04R1/22Arrangements for obtaining desired frequency or directional characteristics for obtaining desired frequency characteristic only 
    • H04R1/24Structural combinations of separate transducers or of two parts of the same transducer and responsive respectively to two or more frequency ranges
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W12/00Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
    • H04W12/03Protecting confidentiality, e.g. by encryption
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W12/00Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
    • H04W12/06Authentication
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/02Services making use of location information
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a configuration method of a combined sound box, a sound box, and an electronic device.
  • a combined speaker constructed from multiple speakers can play multi-channel audio (such as stereo or surround sound) to produce a reverberation effect, which can bring users an immersive feeling.
  • the network distribution information may include: a service set identifier (SSID) and an access password of the wireless local area network to which the speakers need to access, indication information for indicating the role of the speakers, and authentication credentials for data transmission between speakers and key etc.
  • SSID service set identifier
  • the network distribution information may include: a service set identifier (SSID) and an access password of the wireless local area network to which the speakers need to access, indication information for indicating the role of the speakers, and authentication credentials for data transmission between speakers and key etc.
  • the user can manually set the role of each speaker in the speaker application (APP) of an electronic device (such as a mobile phone); and the user can manually operate the speaker APP to control the mobile phone to each speaker one by one.
  • the speaker sends the corresponding distribution network information to construct a combined speaker.
  • the present application provides a configuration method of a combined speaker, a speaker and an electronic device, which can set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner, which can improve the accuracy of the role setting, thereby improving the effect of the combined speaker playing audio.
  • the present application provides a configuration method of a combined sound box, the method is used for configuring a combined sound box in an electronic device, and a first application APP is installed in the electronic device.
  • the combined sound box includes a plurality of sound boxes, and each sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna.
  • the transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance
  • the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance.
  • the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
  • the electronic device may display the first interface of the first APP.
  • the first interface is used to trigger the electronic device to construct an N-channel combined speaker, where N ⁇ 2, and N is a positive integer.
  • the electronic device may display the second interface.
  • the second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels.
  • the electronic device may broadcast a proximity awareness network (NAN) release message.
  • the NAN release message is used to instruct the speaker subscribed to the NAN service to use the first antenna.
  • the electronic device may display the third interface.
  • the third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the first role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the first role is within the first distance.
  • the third interface is also used to indicate the roles of one or more loudspeakers including the loudspeaker of the first role among the N loudspeakers. In this way, the user can make it clear that the role of the speaker currently being configured is the first role.
  • the first speaker among the above N speakers receives the NAN release message, and in response to the NAN release message, the first speaker may use the first antenna to broadcast the first message.
  • the electronic device can receive the first message from the first speaker after the user holds the electronic device close to the speaker of the first role among the N speakers according to the instructions of the third interface.
  • the first message includes the identification of the first speaker and the first secret key.
  • the electronic device can send the first encrypted information to the first sound box.
  • the first encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the first configuration information with the first secret key.
  • the first configuration information includes first distribution network information and first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the first role, and the first distribution network information is used to support interaction between the first speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
  • the electronic device can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, it is possible to solve the problem of incorrect character setting due to the difficulty for the user to distinguish each speaker, and to improve the accuracy of character setting. Moreover, accurately setting the roles of each speaker participating in the combination can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speakers.
  • the effective transmission distance of the speaker using the first antenna (ie, the weak antenna) for wireless communication is the first distance (eg, 0.3 meters). Only when the distance between the electronic device and the speaker is less than the first distance, the short-range message sent by the speaker can be received. And other devices whose distance from the speaker is greater than the first distance cannot receive short-range messages sent by the speaker.
  • Such ultra-short-range communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's secret key and interact with the speaker, and can ensure data transmission between the electronic device and the speaker. security.
  • the second speaker among the above N speakers can also receive the NAN release message, and in response to the NAN release message, the second speaker broadcasts the second message using the first antenna.
  • the electronic device may display the fourth interface.
  • the fourth interface is used for prompting the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the second role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the second role is within the first distance.
  • the fourth interface is further used to indicate the roles of one or more speakers including the speakers of the second role among the N speakers. In this way, the user can make it clear that the role of the speaker currently being configured is the second role.
  • the electronic device can receive the second message from the second speaker.
  • the first message includes the identification of the second speaker and the second secret key.
  • the electronic device can send the second encrypted information to the second sound box.
  • the second encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the second configuration information with the second secret key.
  • the second configuration information includes second network distribution information and second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as the second role, and the second distribution network information is used to support the interaction between the second speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
  • the electronic device may display a fourth interface, prompting the user to hold the electronic device close to the speaker of the second character to configure the speaker of the second character.
  • the electronic device can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, the accuracy of character setting can be improved.
  • the use of ultra-short-distance communication can ensure the security of data transmission between electronic devices and speakers.
  • the electronic device may receive a first confirmation message from the first sound box, and the first confirmation message uses to indicate that the first speaker configuration is successful.
  • the above-mentioned electronic device displaying the fourth interface may specifically include: after the electronic device receives the first confirmation message, displaying the fourth interface. That is to say, the electronic device may configure the speakers of the next role (eg, the second role) after determining that the speaker configuration of one role (eg, the first role) is completed.
  • the above N speakers may form a combined speaker in an AP mode in which the main speaker is used as an access point (access point, AP). That is to say, the master speaker in the N speakers can serve as an AP to provide a wireless local area network (eg, the first wireless local area network), and the slave speakers in the N speakers can access the first wireless local area network provided by the master speaker.
  • the N speakers can interact through the first wireless local area network.
  • the above-mentioned second configuration information may further include first identity information.
  • the first identity information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and is also used to instruct the second speaker to access the master speaker as an AP to provide the first wireless local area network.
  • the foregoing second network configuration information may include: a first SSID and a first access password of the first wireless local area network.
  • the slave speaker (such as the second speaker) can access the master speaker to provide the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password, and can interact with the master speaker through the first wireless local area network.
  • the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information.
  • the second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the main speaker, and is also used to instruct the first speaker to provide the first wireless local area network as an AP.
  • the above-mentioned first network distribution information includes: the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network.
  • the master speaker (such as the first speaker) can provide the first wireless local area network
  • the slave speaker can access the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password, and then connect to the combined speaker through the first wireless local area network. interact with other speakers.
  • the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network provided by the main speaker may be specified by the electronic device.
  • the first SSID and first access password of the first wireless local area network provided by the main speaker may be the electronic device from the main speaker. obtained from the speakers.
  • the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information.
  • the second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the main speaker, and is also used to instruct the first speaker to provide the first wireless local area network as an AP.
  • the above method further includes: the electronic device obtains the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network from the first sound box.
  • the above-mentioned first identity information is also used to instruct the first speaker to access the second wireless local area network provided by the router.
  • the electronic device may indicate the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network to the main speaker (eg, the first speaker) through the above-mentioned first network distribution information.
  • the first network distribution information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
  • the electronic device may obtain the third encrypted information by encrypting the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network by using the above-mentioned first secret key. Then, the third encrypted information is sent to the first speaker.
  • the above-mentioned N sound boxes may form a combined sound box in a non-AP mode.
  • N speakers including master speakers and slave speakers
  • a router to provide a wireless local area network (eg, a second wireless local area network).
  • the N speakers can interact through the second wireless local area network.
  • the above-mentioned second configuration information further includes first identity information.
  • the first identity information is used to indicate that the second sound box is configured as a slave sound box, and is also used to indicate that the second sound box is connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router.
  • the above-mentioned second network distribution information includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
  • the slave speaker (such as the second speaker) can access the router to provide the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and can interact with the master speaker.
  • the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information.
  • the second identity information is used to indicate that the first sound box is configured as the main sound box, and is also used to indicate that the first sound box is connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router.
  • the above-mentioned first network distribution information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
  • the master speaker (such as the first speaker) can access the router to provide the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and can then interact with the slave speaker.
  • the electronic device may also indicate the identity and role of each slave speaker to the master speaker.
  • the above method may further include: the electronic device sends the identification of the second sound box and the second indication information to the first sound box.
  • the master speaker can interact with the slave speakers according to the identification and role of each slave speaker, which is beneficial to ensure that each speaker plays the speaker according to the correct role, and can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speaker.
  • the above-mentioned second configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate for the interaction of the N speakers.
  • the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate for the interaction of the N speakers.
  • the first speaker and the second speaker can interact through the first wireless local area network provided by the first speaker according to the speaker key and the credentials.
  • the speaker key and certificate are used for data exchange between speakers, which can improve the security of data transmission between combined speakers.
  • the present application provides a configuration method of a combined sound box, which is used for configuring a combined sound box for an electronic device.
  • a first APP is installed in the electronic device.
  • the combined sound box includes a plurality of sound boxes, and each sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna.
  • the transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance
  • the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance.
  • the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
  • the electronic device may display the first interface of the first APP.
  • the first interface is used to trigger the electronic device to construct an N-channel combined speaker, where N ⁇ 2, and N is a positive integer.
  • the electronic device may display the second interface.
  • the second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels.
  • the electronic device may broadcast a proximity awareness network (NAN) release message, and display the third interface.
  • the NAN release message is used to instruct the speaker subscribed to the NAN service to use the first antenna.
  • the third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the first role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the first role is within the first distance.
  • the third interface is also used to indicate the roles of one or more loudspeakers including the loudspeaker of the first role among the N loudspeakers. In this way, the user can make it clear that the role of the speaker currently being configured is the first role.
  • the electronic device can receive the first message from the first speaker after the user holds the electronic device close to the speaker of the first role among the N speakers according to the instructions of the third interface.
  • the first message includes the identification of the first speaker and the first secret key.
  • the electronic device can send the first encrypted information to the first sound box.
  • the first encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the first configuration information with the first secret key.
  • the first configuration information includes first distribution network information and first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the first role, and the first distribution network information is used to support interaction between the first speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
  • the electronic device can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, it is possible to solve the problem of incorrect character setting due to the difficulty for the user to distinguish each speaker, and to improve the accuracy of character setting. Moreover, accurately setting the roles of each speaker participating in the combination can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speakers.
  • the effective transmission distance of the speaker using the first antenna (ie, the weak antenna) for wireless communication is the first distance (eg, 0.3 meters). Only when the distance between the electronic device and the speaker is less than the first distance, the short-range message sent by the speaker can be received. And other devices whose distance from the speaker is greater than the first distance cannot receive short-range messages sent by the speaker.
  • Such ultra-short-range communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's secret key and interact with the speaker, and can ensure data transmission between the electronic device and the speaker. security.
  • the present application provides a method for configuring a combined sound box, the method is used for configuring a combined sound box in an electronic device, and the electronic device is installed with a first APP.
  • the combined sound box includes a plurality of sound boxes, and each sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna.
  • the transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance
  • the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance
  • the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
  • the electronic device can display the first interface of the first APP; the first interface is used to trigger the electronic device to construct a combined sound box of N channels, N ⁇ 2, and N is a positive integer.
  • the electronic device may display the second interface, and broadcast a NAN release message.
  • the second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels. The role of each speaker in the N speakers is determined by the arrangement of the N speakers.
  • the NAN release message is used to instruct the speaker subscribed to the NAN service to use the first antenna.
  • the electronic device may display the third interface.
  • the third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the first role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the first role is within the first distance.
  • the third interface is also used to indicate one or more roles of each speaker among the N speakers including the speaker of the first role.
  • the electronic device receives a first message from the first speaker of the first character, where the first message includes an identifier of the first speaker and a first secret key.
  • the electronic device can send the first encrypted information to the first sound box.
  • the first encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the first configuration information with the first secret key.
  • the first configuration information includes first distribution network information and first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the first role, and the first distribution information is used to support the interaction between the first speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
  • the electronic device can broadcast the NAN release message in response to the user's first operation on the first interface;
  • the second operation on the second interface is to broadcast the NAN release message.
  • the above-mentioned second interface may also be used to indicate the role of each speaker in the N speakers. That is to say, on the second interface, the electronic device can not only indicate to the user the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels, but also indicate to the user the role of each of the N speakers.
  • the electronic device may display a fourth interface.
  • the fourth interface is used for prompting the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the second role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the second role is within the first distance.
  • the fourth interface is further used to indicate the roles of one or more speakers including the speakers of the second role among the N speakers. In this way, the user can make it clear that the role of the speaker currently being configured is the second role.
  • the electronic device can receive the second message from the second speaker.
  • the second message includes the identification of the second speaker and the second secret key.
  • the electronic device can send the second encrypted information to the second sound box.
  • the second encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the second configuration information with the second secret key.
  • the second configuration information includes second network distribution information and second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as the second role, and the second distribution network information is used to support the interaction between the second speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
  • the configuration of the speaker of the first role is completed after the electronic device sends the first encrypted information to the first speaker.
  • the electronic device may display a fourth interface, prompting the user to hold the electronic device close to the speaker of the second character to configure the speaker of the second character.
  • the electronic device may configure the speakers of the next role (eg the second role) after determining that the speaker configuration of one role (eg, the first role) is completed.
  • the above-mentioned electronic device displaying the fourth interface may include: after the electronic device receives the first confirmation message from the first speaker, displaying the fourth interface. Wherein, the first confirmation message is used to indicate that the configuration of the first speaker is successful.
  • the above N speakers may form a combined speaker in an AP mode in which the main speaker is used as an access point (access point, AP). That is to say, the master speaker in the N speakers can serve as an AP to provide a wireless local area network (eg, the first wireless local area network), and the slave speakers in the N speakers can access the first wireless local area network provided by the master speaker. The N speakers can interact through the first wireless local area network.
  • AP access point
  • the above-mentioned second configuration information may further include the first identity information.
  • the first identity information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and is also used to instruct the second speaker to access the master speaker as an AP to provide the first wireless local area network.
  • the foregoing second network configuration information may include: a first SSID and a first access password of the first wireless local area network.
  • the slave speaker eg, the second speaker
  • the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information.
  • the second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as a main speaker, and is also used to instruct the first speaker to provide a first wireless local area network as an AP.
  • the above-mentioned first network distribution information includes: the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network.
  • the master speaker eg, the first speaker
  • the slave speaker can access the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password.
  • the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network provided by the main speaker may be specified by the electronic device.
  • the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network provided by the main speaker may be The electronics are taken from the main speakers.
  • the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information.
  • the second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the main speaker, and is also used to instruct the first speaker to provide the first wireless local area network as an AP.
  • the above method further includes: the electronic device obtains the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network from the first sound box.
  • the above-mentioned first identity information is also used to instruct the first speaker to access the second wireless local area network provided by the router .
  • the electronic device may indicate the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network to the main speaker (eg, the first speaker) through the above-mentioned first network distribution information.
  • the first network distribution information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
  • the electronic device may obtain the third encrypted information by encrypting the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network by using the above-mentioned first secret key. Then, the third encrypted information is sent to the first speaker.
  • N sound boxes may form a combined sound box in a non-AP mode.
  • N speakers including master speakers and slave speakers
  • a router to provide a wireless local area network (eg, a second wireless local area network).
  • the N speakers can interact through the second wireless local area network.
  • the above-mentioned second configuration information further includes the first identity information.
  • the first identity information is used to indicate that the second sound box is configured as a slave sound box, and is also used to indicate that the second sound box is connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router.
  • the above-mentioned second network distribution information includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
  • the slave speaker (such as the second speaker) can access the router to provide the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and can interact with the master speaker.
  • the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information.
  • the second identity information is used to indicate that the first sound box is configured as the main sound box, and is also used to indicate that the first sound box is connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router.
  • the above-mentioned first network distribution information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
  • the master speaker (such as the first speaker) can access the router to provide the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and can then interact with the slave speaker.
  • the electronic device may also indicate the identity and role of each slave speaker to the master speaker.
  • the above method may further include: the electronic device sending the identification of the second sound box and the second indication information to the first sound box.
  • the master speaker can interact with the slave speakers according to the identification and role of each slave speaker, which is beneficial to ensure that each speaker plays the speaker according to the correct role, and can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speaker.
  • the above-mentioned second configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate used for interaction of the N speakers.
  • the speaker key and certificate are used for data exchange between speakers, which can improve the security of data transmission between combined speakers.
  • the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate used for the interaction of the N speakers.
  • the speaker key and certificate are used for data exchange between speakers, which can improve the security of data transmission between combined speakers.
  • the present application provides a configuration method of a combined sound box, which is applied to a sound box, the sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna, the transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance. distance, the first distance is less than the second distance.
  • the method may include: the sound box receives a proximity awareness network NAN broadcast message broadcast by the electronic device, and the NAN release message is used to instruct the sound box to use the first antenna; in response to the NAN releasing the message, the sound box uses the first antenna to broadcast the message; wherein, the message includes the sound box
  • the sound box receives the encrypted information from the electronic equipment, and uses the secret key to decrypt the encrypted information to obtain configuration information; wherein, the encrypted information is sent by the electronic equipment after receiving the message, and the encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the configuration information with the secret key.
  • the configuration information includes role indication information and distribution network information
  • the role indication information is used to indicate the role the speaker is configured with
  • the distribution network information is used to support the interaction between the speaker and other speakers in the combination speaker.
  • the message broadcast by the speaker may be the first message or the second message described in the first aspect or the second aspect and any possible design manners thereof.
  • the message is broadcast using the first antenna (ie, the ultra-short-range antenna or weak antenna) and can therefore be called a short-range message.
  • the above method may further include: the speaker subscribes to the NAN service; wherein, the device subscribed to the NAN service can receive and respond to the NAN publishing message.
  • the above method may further include: the speaker sends out prompt information, and the prompt information is used to indicate the role that the speaker is configured with.
  • the above-mentioned sound box uses the first antenna to broadcast the message, including: the sound box periodically switches to use the first antenna and the second antenna; when the sound box uses the first antenna, broadcast the message.
  • the above configuration information further includes: identity information used to indicate that the speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and the identity information is also used to instruct the speaker to access the first wireless local area network; network distribution information It also includes: a first service set identifier SSID and a first access password of the first wireless local area network.
  • the above method further includes: the sound box is connected to the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password, and interacts with the main sound box in the N sound boxes through the first wireless local area network.
  • the above configuration information further includes: identity information used to indicate that the speaker is configured as the main speaker, and the identity information is also used to instruct the speaker to serve as an access point AP to provide the first wireless local area network ;
  • the network distribution information further includes: the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network.
  • the above method further includes: the speaker acts as an AP to provide a first wireless local area network, and other speakers in the combined speaker are connected to the first wireless local area network; the speaker interacts with other speakers in the combined speaker through the first wireless local area network.
  • the above configuration information further includes: identity information used to indicate that the speaker is configured as a master speaker or identity information that the speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and the identity information is also used to indicate that the speaker is configured Access the second wireless local area network provided by the router;
  • the network configuration information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
  • the above method further includes: the speaker is connected to the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and interacts with other speakers in the combined speaker through the second wireless local area network.
  • the above configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate for the interaction of the N speakers.
  • the above method further includes: the speaker interacts with other speakers in the combined speaker according to the speaker key and the certificate.
  • the above method further includes: after the speaker receives the encrypted information, sending a confirmation message to the electronic device; operation, sending a confirmation message to the electronic device; wherein, the prompt information is used to indicate the role that the speaker is configured with.
  • the confirmation message is used to indicate that the speaker configuration is successful.
  • the present application provides an electronic device in which a first APP is installed.
  • the electronic device includes: a memory, a display screen, a communication module and one or more processors.
  • the memory, display screen, and communication module are coupled to the processor.
  • the display is used to display images or interfaces generated by the processor.
  • This communication module is used to communicate with other devices.
  • the memory is used to store data in the electronic device.
  • the memory is also used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device is made to perform the method performed by the electronic device in the first aspect, the second aspect or the third aspect and any possible design manners thereof.
  • the present application provides a sound box.
  • the sound box may be the first sound box or the second sound box described in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna, the transmission distance of the first antenna is a first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is a second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
  • the enclosure includes memory, speakers, a communication module, and one or more processors.
  • the communication module includes a first antenna and a second antenna, the transmission distance of the first antenna is a first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is a second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
  • the memory, the speaker, and the communication module are coupled to the processor; the speaker is used to play audio data, the communication module is used to communicate with other devices, and the memory is used to store data in the sound box. data.
  • the memory is also used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions. When executed by the processor, the computer instructions cause the sound box to perform the method performed by the sound box in the first aspect or the fourth aspect and any possible design manners thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system is applied to an electronic device including a display screen, a communication module, and a memory.
  • the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors.
  • the interface circuit and the processor are interconnected by wires.
  • the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from the memory of the electronic device and send the signals to the processor, the signals including computer instructions stored in the memory.
  • the processor executes the computer instructions
  • the electronic device executes the method performed by the electronic device in the first aspect, the second aspect or the third aspect and any possible design manners thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, and the chip system is applied to a sound box including a communication module and a memory.
  • the communication module includes a first antenna and a second antenna, the transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
  • the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors. The interface circuit and the processor are interconnected by wires. The interface circuit is used to receive a signal from the memory of the speaker and send the signal to the processor, the signal comprising computer instructions stored in the memory. When the processor executes the computer instructions, the sound box executes the method described in the first aspect or the fourth aspect and any possible design manners thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions are executed on a device, the device causes the device to perform the operations of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect.
  • the device may be the aforementioned electronic device or a speaker.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, or the fourth aspect and the same. any of the possible design methods described.
  • the computer can be an electronic device or a speaker.
  • the beneficial effects that can be achieved by the computer program product described in the tenth aspect may refer to the beneficial effects in the first aspect and any possible design methods thereof, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system to which a configuration method of a combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the present application is applied;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a sound box provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 4A is a schematic structural diagram of an antenna in a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the application.
  • 4B is a schematic structural diagram of an antenna in another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the application.
  • 4C is a schematic structural diagram of an antenna in another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 4D is a schematic structural diagram of an antenna in another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 4E is a schematic diagram of a transmission distance of another antenna provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a configuration method of a combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the placement layout of each speaker in a surround sound combination speaker provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 9A is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 9B is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 10A is a schematic diagram of a display interface of a sound box provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 10B is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another sound box provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a method for switching a strong antenna and a weak antenna for a speaker box provided by an embodiment of the application;
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another sound box provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of a system of a combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 16 is a system schematic diagram of another combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 17 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 19 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device and a sound box provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural composition diagram of a chip system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are only used for descriptive purposes, and should not be construed as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of indicated technical features.
  • a feature defined as “first”, “second” may expressly or implicitly include one or more of that feature.
  • plural means two or more.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a method for configuring a combined sound box, and the method is used for an electronic device to interact with a plurality of sound boxes participating in the combination to construct a combined sound box.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system to which a method for configuring a sound box combination provided by an embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • the communication system may include an electronic device 100 (eg, a mobile phone) and multiple speakers (eg, a speaker 201 , a speaker 202 , a speaker 203 , a speaker 204 , and a speaker 205 ) participating in the combination.
  • an electronic device 100 eg, a mobile phone
  • multiple speakers eg, a speaker 201 , a speaker 202 , a speaker 203 , a speaker 204 , and a speaker 205 .
  • a first APP (also referred to as a management APP or a speaker APP) for managing speakers may be installed in the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can support the user to set the role of each speaker in an intuitive manner through the above-mentioned first APP, transmit network distribution information to each speaker, and construct the above-mentioned multiple speakers into a combined speaker.
  • the electronic device can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, it is possible to solve the problem of incorrect character setting due to the difficulty for the user to distinguish each speaker, and to improve the accuracy of character setting. Moreover, accurately setting the roles of each speaker participating in the combination can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speakers.
  • a plurality of speakers constructed as a combined speaker can play multi-channel audio data to form a stereo or surround sound field and generate a reverberation effect, which can bring users an immersive feeling.
  • each speaker in the combined speaker can be used to play audio data of one channel.
  • the above-mentioned multiple speakers can form a stereo combined speaker.
  • the plurality of speakers may be two speakers.
  • One of the two speakers plays the role of the left channel and is used to play the audio data of the left channel; the other speaker plays the role of the right channel and is used to play the audio data of the right channel.
  • the above-mentioned multiple speakers can form a combined speaker for surround sound.
  • the plurality of sound boxes may be five sound boxes, such as the five sound boxes shown in FIG. 1 .
  • One of the five speakers (such as the speaker 201) plays the role of the front left channel, and is used to play the audio data of the front left channel; the other speaker (such as the speaker 202) plays the role of the front right channel , used to play the audio data of the right front channel;
  • the role of another speaker (such as the speaker 203) is the center channel, used to play the audio data of the center channel;
  • the role of another speaker (such as the speaker 204) is the left surround channel, and is used to play the audio data of the left surround channel;
  • the role of another speaker (such as the speaker 205) is the right surround channel, and is used to play the audio data of the right surround channel.
  • the number of sound boxes in the combined sound box in the embodiment of the present application includes, but is not limited to, the numbers described in the above two usage scenarios. Using a combination of speakers built with different numbers of speakers to play audio data can produce different reverberation effects. In the embodiment of the present application, the number of sound boxes in the combined sound box is not limited. In the following embodiments, the method of the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the five sound boxes shown in FIG. 1 participating in the combination and being used to construct the combined sound box as an example.
  • the electronic device in this embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop, a wearable device (such as a smart watch), a handheld computer, a notebook computer, and an ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC). ), netbooks, and devices including display screens and short-range communication modules, such as cellular phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), augmented reality (AR) ⁇ virtual reality (VR) devices, etc.
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • the specific form of the electronic device is not particularly limited in the application embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned speaker may be a smart speaker.
  • the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example as a mobile phone to illustrate the structure of the electronic device provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, Antenna 1, Antenna 2, Mobile Communication Module 150, Wireless Communication Module 160, Audio Module 170, Speaker 170A, Receiver 170B, Microphone 170C, Headphone Jack 170D, Sensor Module 180, Key 190, Motor 191, Indicator 192, Camera 193, a display screen 194, and a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the above sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, Sensors such as ambient light sensor 180L and bone conduction sensor 180M.
  • the structure illustrated in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or some components may be combined, or some components may be split, or a different arrangement of components.
  • the illustrated components may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processor
  • graphics processor graphics processor
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 .
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the latency of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby increasing the efficiency of the system.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transceiver (universal asynchronous transmitter) receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transceiver
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in this embodiment is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 .
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 and supplies power to the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 may be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modulation and demodulation processor, the baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • the antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of the wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G etc. applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA) and the like.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 and the mobile communication module 150 are coupled.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and then turn it into an electromagnetic wave for radiation through the antenna 1 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (WLAN), bluetooth (BT), global navigation satellite system (GNSS), frequency modulation (FM) applied on the electronic device 100 ), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT bluetooth
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • FM frequency modulation
  • NFC near field communication technology
  • NFC near field communication
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the above-mentioned WLAN may be a (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) network.
  • the antenna 2 of the electronic device 100 and the wireless communication module 160 are coupled.
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , perform frequency modulation on it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 2 .
  • the electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
  • the display screen 194 may be a touch screen, and the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193, the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193 .
  • the ISP may be provided in the camera 193 .
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100 .
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example to save files like music, video etc in external memory card.
  • Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 121 .
  • the processor 110 may execute instructions stored in the internal memory 121, and the internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like.
  • the storage data area may store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100 and the like.
  • the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 may implement audio functions through an audio module 170, a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, a microphone 170C, an earphone interface 170D, an application processor, and the like. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used for converting digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and also for converting analog audio input into digital audio signal.
  • the earphone jack 170D is used to connect wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D can be the USB interface 130, or can be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the keys 190 include a power-on key, a volume key, and the like. Keys 190 may be mechanical keys. It can also be a touch key. Motor 191 can generate vibrating cues. The motor 191 can be used for vibrating alerts for incoming calls, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging state, the change of the power, and can also be used to indicate a message, a missed call, a notification, and the like.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card. The SIM card can be contacted and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card and so on.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a sound box 300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the speaker 300 may include: a processor 301, an external memory interface 302, an internal memory 303, a USB interface 305, a power management module 304, an antenna a, a wireless communication module 308, a display screen 306, an audio module 307, and Speaker 307A, etc.
  • the processor 301 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 301 may include an AP, modem processor, GPU, ISP, controller, memory, video codec, DSP, baseband processor, and/or NPU, etc. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated into one or more processors, and a memory may also be provided in the processor 301 for storing instructions and data.
  • the processor 301 may include an AP, modem processor, GPU, ISP, controller, memory, video codec, DSP, baseband processor, and/or NPU, etc.
  • different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated into one or more processors, and a memory may also be provided in the processor 301 for storing instructions and data.
  • the power management module 304 is used to connect power.
  • the power management module 304 can also be connected with the processor 301, the internal memory 303, the display screen 306, the wireless communication module 308, and the like.
  • the power management module 304 receives power input through the USB interface 305, and supplies power to the processor 301, the internal memory 303, the display screen 306, the wireless communication module 308, and the like.
  • the power management module 304 may also be provided in the processor 301 .
  • the wireless communication function of the speaker 300 can be realized by the antenna and the wireless communication module 308 and the like.
  • the wireless communication module 308 can provide a wireless communication solution including WLAN (such as Wi-Fi network), Bluetooth (BT), GNSS, etc. applied on the speaker 300 .
  • WLAN such as Wi-Fi network
  • BT Bluetooth
  • GNSS GNSS
  • the wireless communication module 308 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 308 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna a, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 301 .
  • the wireless communication module 308 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 301, frequency-modulate the signal, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna.
  • the antenna a of the sound box 300 is coupled with the wireless communication module 308, so that the sound box 300 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication module 308 in this embodiment of the present application may be a Bluetooth module or a Wi-Fi module.
  • the wireless communication module 308 is used for data transmission with the electronic device 100 and other speakers.
  • the above-mentioned antenna a may include one or more antennas.
  • the one or more antennas can be divided into a first antenna (weak antenna) and a second antenna (normal antenna, also called strong antenna).
  • the transmission distance (eg, the first distance) over which the first antenna transmits the wireless signal is smaller than the transmission distance (eg, the second distance) over which the second antenna transmits the wireless signal.
  • the second antenna and the first antenna are switchable.
  • the second antenna and the first antenna implement network communication with other devices (such as mobile phones) through the wireless communication module on the sound box 300 .
  • FIG. 4A shows a schematic diagram of an antenna structure in a sound box 300 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the above-mentioned second antenna and first antenna may be two different antennas.
  • the sound box 300 shown in FIG. 3 may be the electronic device 40 (eg, a sound box) shown in FIG. 4A .
  • the electronic device 40 may include a microcontroller unit (MCU) 404 , a wireless communication module 403 , an antenna 401 and an antenna 402 .
  • MCU microcontroller unit
  • the antenna 401 shown in FIG. 4A is the above-mentioned second antenna, and the antenna 402 is the first antenna.
  • the antenna a shown in FIG. 3 may include the antenna 401 and the antenna 402 shown in FIG. 4A .
  • the wireless communication module 308 shown in FIG. 3 may be the wireless communication module 403 shown in FIG. 4A ; the MCU 404 shown in FIG. 4A may be implemented by the processor 301 shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the above-mentioned wireless communication module 403 may be a Wi-Fi chip, and a radio frequency input/output (RFIO) pin of the wireless communication module 403 is connected to the antenna 401 or the antenna 402 through a SPDT switch.
  • RFIO radio frequency input/output
  • the MCU 404 may include a central processing unit, a memory, a counter, a clock, an interrupt, a serial peripheral interface (SPI), a UART interface, a universal serial bus interface, and the like.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus that converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • the MCU 404 exchanges information with the wireless communication module 403 through the UART interface.
  • the wireless communication module 403 is used to realize wireless communication between the speaker 300 and other devices (eg, mobile phones).
  • other devices eg, mobile phones.
  • the wireless communication module 403 reference may be made to the detailed description of the wireless communication module 308 in the above-mentioned embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the antenna 401 and the antenna 402 can be used to transmit and receive electromagnetic waves.
  • the wireless communication module 403 can convert the electromagnetic waves received from the antenna 401 or the antenna 402 into signals, and send the signals to the MCU 404 for processing.
  • the wireless communication module 403 can receive the signal to be sent from the MCU 404, and radiate it into electromagnetic waves via the antenna 401 or the antenna 402.
  • the first distance over which the antenna 402 transmits the signal is smaller than the second distance over which the antenna 401 transmits the signal.
  • the MCU 404 can control the switching of the antenna 401 and the antenna 402.
  • the speaker 300 adopts the antenna 401 if the distance between the speaker 300 and other devices (such as mobile phones) is less than the second distance, the other devices (such as mobile phones) can receive the signals transmitted by the speaker 300 through the antenna 402, thereby realizing other devices.
  • the speaker 300 can use the antenna 401 to send the first message or the second message to the surrounding devices; the speaker 300 can receive the NAN announcement message sent by other devices through the antenna 402 .
  • the speaker 300 can also be connected to a Wi-Fi router through the antenna 401 or the antenna 402 .
  • the above-mentioned second antenna and the first antenna may share a part of the wiring, for example, as described in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 4B-4D .
  • the speaker 300 in the embodiment of the present application implements ultra-short-range communication through the first antenna.
  • the dual antennas (the first antenna and the second antenna) in the sound box 300 can be switched by a radio frequency switch.
  • both the first antenna and the radio frequency switch (the first antenna is shown in the dashed box in FIG. 4B to FIG. 4D ) can be placed in the shielding case or the first antenna can be placed in the chip.
  • 4B-4D show schematic structural diagrams of three kinds of first antennas.
  • the purpose of the first antenna in the embodiment of the present application is to reduce the transmission distance as much as possible.
  • the principle of constructing the first antenna may be:
  • the specific implementation of the first antenna may adopt:
  • the function of the above-mentioned shielding cover is to cut off the path from the electromagnetic wave radiated by the antenna to the receiver, so as to achieve the purpose of weakening the radiation.
  • the above-mentioned shortening of the antenna means that the first antenna is shorter than the second antenna.
  • the structures of the three first antennas are shown in FIGS. 4B to 4D , and the first antennas are shown in the dashed boxes in FIGS. 4B to 4D .
  • the structures of the second antenna in FIGS. 4B to 4D are all connected to a filter circuit (eg, a ⁇ -type circuit), a matching circuit (eg, a ⁇ -type circuit), and an antenna body outside the matching circuit (eg, the antenna body) through RFIO pins. Can be a piece of metal trace).
  • the lengths of the first antenna a shown in the dashed box in FIG.
  • the first antenna b shown in the dashed box in FIG. 4C , and the first antenna c shown in the dashed box in FIG. 4D are different, but compared with the second antenna Shorter.
  • the function of the filter circuit is to prevent interference, and the matching circuit is used to match the second antenna.
  • the first antenna a may be directly disconnected by using the radio frequency input/output (RFIO) pins of the Wi-Fi chip in the shield.
  • the first antenna a can be composed of RFIO pins, traces, and the first switch of the two switches (the first switch is not connected to any device).
  • the 2-way switch refers to the switch between the RFIO and the filter circuit, through which the RFIO pin can be connected or disconnected from the filter circuit; the first-way switch is the one shown in 4B that is connected to the RFIO pin, And the switch disconnected from the filter circuit.
  • the 2-way switch in the embodiment of the present application may be a single-pole double-throw switch.
  • the first antenna b may use the RFIO of the Wi-Fi chip in the shield to connect to the ground through a matching device (for example, a resistor).
  • the first antenna b may be composed of RFIO pins, traces, the first switch of the 2-way switch (the first switch is connected to a resistor), and a resistor. Part of the electromagnetic wave radiation can be converted into heat energy and consumed by grounding the resistance, thereby reducing the radiation efficiency of the first antenna b.
  • the 2-way switch refers to the switch between the RFIO pin and the resistor and the filter circuit. Through this switch, the RFIO pin can be connected to the resistor and disconnected from the filter circuit, or the RFIO pin can be connected to the resistor. disconnected and connected to the filter circuit.
  • the first switch is a switch connected to the resistor and disconnected from the filter circuit.
  • the first antenna c may use the RFIO pin of the Wi-Fi chip in the shield to connect to the ground through a filter circuit circuit matched with the chip and then a matching device (eg, a resistor).
  • the first antenna c may be composed of RFIO pins, traces, filter circuits, the first switch of the 2-way switch (the first switch is connected to a resistor), and a resistor. Part of the electromagnetic wave radiation can be converted into heat energy and consumed by grounding the resistance, thereby reducing the radiation efficiency of the first antenna b.
  • the 2-way switch refers to the switch between the filter circuit in the shield and the resistor and the matching circuit outside the shield.
  • the filter circuit in the shield can be connected with the resistor and connected with the outside of the shield.
  • the matching circuit is disconnected, or the filter circuit in the shield can be disconnected from the resistor and connected with the matching circuit outside the shield.
  • the first switch is a switch that connects the filter circuit and the resistor in the shield.
  • the second antenna in FIG. 4B to FIG. 4C may be composed of RFIO pins, traces, the second switch in the 2-way switch, a filter circuit, a matching circuit, and an antenna body connected outside the matching circuit.
  • the second switch is a switch connecting the RFIO pin and the filter circuit.
  • the second antenna in FIG. 4D may be composed of RFIO pins, filter circuits, traces, the second switch of the 2-way switches, a matching circuit, and an antenna body connected to the outside of the matching circuit.
  • the second switch is a switch that connects the filter circuit inside the shield and the matching circuit outside the shield.
  • the wireless communication module 403 shown in FIG. 4A may be the Wi-Fi chip described in FIG. 4B to FIG. 4C .
  • the above different first antenna structures combined with the different transmit power (Tx power) settings of the Wi-Fi chip, can meet different ultra-short-distance communication requirements (for example, from 10cm to 2m).
  • Table 1 shows the communication distances of several different first antenna structures with different transmit powers.
  • the difference between the maximum transmit power and the minimum transmit power of the antenna is correlated. If the minimum transmission power of the speaker 300 is reduced very low, the maximum transmission power will also be reduced, so that the distance requirement during normal operation cannot be met.
  • manufacturers of smart devices can use different first antenna structures and transmit powers to ensure the communication distance of the smart devices.
  • the thickness of the smart air conditioner housing may be different, so under the condition of the same first antenna structure and the same transmit power, the communication distance at which the smart air conditioner can be discovered may also be different.
  • Different smart device manufacturers can test the safe distance at which the smart device can be discovered according to the structure of the smart device itself, in conjunction with the structure of the first antenna and a certain transmit power.
  • the second distance is 5 meters and the first distance is 0.3 meters.
  • a second antenna ie, a strong antenna
  • the speaker 300 can be connected to Communication with other devices (such as speakers);
  • the speaker 300 uses the first antenna (ie, a weak antenna), if the distance between the speaker 300 and other devices (such as mobile phones) is less than the first distance (such as the other devices are located in Figure 4E ) Position 2), the speaker 300 can communicate with other devices (such as mobile phones).
  • the speaker 300 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 306, and the application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 306 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 301 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
  • Display screen 306 is used to display images, videos, and the like.
  • the display screen 306 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can adopt LCD, OLED, AMOLED, FLED, Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, QLED, etc.
  • the display screen 306 may be used to display the image content corresponding to the audio data played by the speaker 300 , the operation interface of the speaker 300 , and the like.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • Speaker 300 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the sound box 300 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, such as: MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
  • Internal memory 303 may be used to store computer executable program code including instructions.
  • the processor 301 executes various functional applications and data processing of the speaker 300 by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 303 .
  • the internal memory 303 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like.
  • the storage data area can store data (such as audio playback records) created during the use of the speaker 300 and the like.
  • the internal memory 303 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, UFS, and the like.
  • the external memory interface 302 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the advertising device 120.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 301 through the external memory interface 302 to realize the data storage function. For example to save files like music, video etc in external memory card.
  • the speaker 300 can implement audio functions through an audio module 307, a speaker 307A, a microphone 307B, an application processor, and the like. Such as music playback, recording, voice capture, etc.
  • the audio module 307 is used for converting digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and also for converting analog audio input into digital audio signal. Audio module 307 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 307 may be provided in the processor 301 , or some functional modules of the audio module 307 may be provided in the processor 301 . Speaker 307A, also referred to as "speaker”, is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The microphone 407B, also called “microphone” or “microphone”, is used to collect sound signals and convert the sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the methods in the following embodiments can all be implemented in the electronic device 200 having the above-mentioned hardware structure and the sound box 300 having the above-mentioned hardware structure.
  • the above-mentioned electronic device 200 is the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1 , and the sound box 201 , sound box 202 , sound box 203 , sound box 204 and sound box 205 shown in FIG. Methods.
  • the mobile phone 100 needs to interact with the speaker 201 , the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 and the speaker 205 respectively, so as to realize the configuration of the combined speaker.
  • the interaction between the mobile phone 100 and the speakers 201 and 202 is used as an example to introduce the interaction between the mobile phone 100 and the speakers in the process of configuring the combined speakers on the mobile phone 100 .
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a configuration method of a combined sound box.
  • the configuration method of the combined sound box may include S501-S523.
  • speakers eg, speakers 201, 202, 203, 204, and 205 subscribe to a proximity awareness network (NAN) service.
  • NAN proximity awareness network
  • preset buttons may be provided on the speaker.
  • This preset button is used to trigger the speaker to subscribe to the NAN service.
  • the preset button may be called a "network distribution" button.
  • the above-mentioned preset keys may be physical keys disposed on the upper surface of the sound box or on any side of the sound box.
  • the position of the preset button in the sound box is not limited.
  • the sound box may include a display screen, and the above-mentioned preset keys may be virtual keys displayed on the display screen.
  • the speaker in response to the user's operation 1 (such as a single-click operation, a double-click operation, or a long-press operation, etc.) on the "distribution network” button, the speaker can subscribe to the NAN service.
  • the speaker in response to the user's operation 1 on the "distribution network” button, the speaker can enter the network distribution mode. In the distribution network mode, the speaker can automatically subscribe to the NAN service.
  • the NAN service is also called the WiFi awareness service.
  • the NAN mechanism is a standard based on WiFi technology proposed by the WiFi Alliance (WFA).
  • WFA WiFi Alliance
  • a NAN network formed by a plurality of devices with NAN functions (NAN devices for short) is called a cluster.
  • Each NAN device in a cluster can perform service discovery in the discovery window (DW) of the cluster to discover other NAN devices that can transmit data with it.
  • DW discovery window
  • subscribing the speaker to the NAN service specifically refers to: the speaker activates or starts the NAN function.
  • the speaker activates or starts the NAN function.
  • it can set an identity (identity, ID) based on its own media access control (media access control, MAC) address.
  • MAC media access control
  • a device activates or starts the NAN function, if it receives a NAN release message from another device, it can respond to the NAN release message and reply with a corresponding response message.
  • the speakers 201 , 202 , 203 , 204 and 205 shown in FIG. 1 can respectively enter the subscription NAN service in response to the user's operation 1 on the respective preset keys.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays a first interface of the first APP, where the first interface is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to construct an N-channel combined speaker.
  • N is a positive integer.
  • N can be any positive integer such as 2, 3, 5, or 7.
  • the first APP in this embodiment of the present application may be an application corresponding to the icon "speaker" 601 shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can receive the user's click operation on the “speaker” 601; in response to the click operation, the mobile phone 100 can start the first APP, and display the home page 701 of the first APP shown in FIG. 7A (ie the first APP). interface 701).
  • the first interface 701 includes a plurality of combination speaker options, such as a “stereo combination speaker” option 702 and a “surround sound combination speaker” option 703 .
  • the above combination speaker option is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to construct a combination speaker.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays a second interface.
  • the second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers.
  • the operation a is the first operation.
  • the operation a may be a click operation (eg, a single-click operation) by the user on the "stereo sound box" option 702 or the "surround sound box” option 703 shown in FIG. 7A .
  • the above operation a triggers the mobile phone 100 to construct a combined speaker including five-channel surround sound as an example.
  • the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's operation a on the option 703 of "surround sound combination speakers".
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C .
  • the second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C includes icons of five speakers corresponding to the "surround sound combination speakers” option 703, and indicates the placement layout of the five speakers.
  • the above-mentioned second interface further includes prompt information, where the prompt information is used to prompt the user to place the above-mentioned N speakers according to the layout indicated by the second interface.
  • the second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C further includes prompt information 705, such as "please place the speakers according to the following layout".
  • the above-mentioned second interface may further include identifiers assigned by the electronic device to the above-mentioned N sound boxes, such as sound box 1, sound box 2, ..., sound box N.
  • the above-mentioned second interface may further indicate the role of each of the above-mentioned N loudspeakers.
  • the roles of the corresponding speakers are indicated below the icons of the respective speakers, such as the left front channel, the right front channel, the center channel, the left surround channel and the right channel . It should be noted that the role of each speaker is determined by the placement of the speaker in the N speakers.
  • the user can place the five speakers shown in FIG. 1 according to the placement layout indicated by the second interface. For example, the user can adjust the arrangement of the five speakers shown in FIG. 1 , and the adjusted arrangement of speakers 201 , 202 , 203 , 204 , and 205 shown in FIG. 1 is shown in FIG. 8 .
  • the placement position of the speaker 201 in the five speakers corresponds to the placement position of the left front channel shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C; the placement position of the speaker 202 in the five speakers is the same as that shown in FIG.
  • the placement position of the right front channel shown in 7B or FIG. 7C corresponds;
  • the placement position of the sound box 203 in the five sound boxes corresponds to the placement position of the middle front channel described in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C ;
  • the placement position of 204 in the five speakers corresponds to the placement position of the left surround channel described in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C ;
  • the placement of the surround channels corresponds.
  • S501 may be executed first, and then S502-S503 may be executed; S502-S503 may also be executed first, and then S501 may be executed; or, S501 may also be executed while executing S502-S503.
  • This embodiment of the present application does not limit the sequence of execution of S501 and S502-S503.
  • the mobile phone 100 In response to the user's operation b on the second interface, the mobile phone 100 broadcasts a NAN release message.
  • the operation b is the second operation.
  • the operation b may be a user's click operation (such as a single-click operation, a double-click operation, or a long-press operation) on a preset control in the second interface.
  • the preset control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start network configuration for the N speakers.
  • the preset control may be a "start network configuration" control.
  • the above operation b is a click operation by the user on the "start network configuration" control 706 in the second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C .
  • the above operation b may also be a preset gesture input by the user in the second interface, such as an S-shaped gesture, an L-shaped gesture, a two-finger upward sliding gesture or a three-finger sliding upward gesture, and the like.
  • operation b is a user's click operation on a preset control in the second interface.
  • the mobile phone 100 may publish the NAN service.
  • the mobile phone 100 publishes the NAN service, which specifically refers to: the mobile phone 100 broadcasts the NAN publishing message.
  • the speaker 201, the speaker 202, the speaker 203, the speaker 204, and the speaker 205 shown in FIG. 8 have all subscribed to the NAN service. Therefore, the sound box 201, the sound box 202, the sound box 203, the sound box 204, and the sound box 205 shown in FIG. 8 can all receive and publish messages in response to the NAN.
  • the mobile phone 100 displays a third interface.
  • the third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 1, so that the distance between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker of the character 1 is within the first distance.
  • the above-mentioned character 1 is the first character.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the third interface 901 shown in FIG. 9A.
  • the third interface 901 is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 1 (eg, the left front channel).
  • the third interface 901 includes prompt information 902, such as "please bring the mobile phone close to the speaker whose role is the left front channel".
  • the role 1 may be the role of any one of the above N speakers.
  • the character 1 is the left front channel
  • the speaker of the character 1 is the speaker 201 shown in FIG. 8 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may also display the above-mentioned icon of the speaker of the character 1 in a predetermined manner on the third interface.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the third interface 903 shown in FIG. 9B.
  • the icon of the speaker of the character 1 eg, the left front channel
  • the speaker of the character 1 can be intuitively distinguished from the speakers of other characters, so that the user can quickly locate the position of the speaker of the character 1 among the N speakers.
  • preset manners include but are not limited to the manner in which the icon of the speaker of the left front channel is displayed in FIG. 9B , and other display manners are not repeated here.
  • the speaker 201, the speaker 202, the speaker 203, the speaker 204, and the speaker 205 are all subscribed to the NAN service, that is, the NAN function is activated or started. Therefore, the speaker 201 , the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 , and the speaker 205 subscribed to the NAN service can receive the NAN release message broadcast by the mobile phone 100 .
  • the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S506.
  • S504 may be performed first to broadcast the NAN release message, and then S505 may be performed; or S505 may be performed first, and then S504 may be performed to broadcast the NAN release message; At the same time, S505 is performed.
  • This embodiment of the present application does not limit the sequence in which the mobile phone 100 broadcasts the NAN release message and performs S505.
  • the speakers receive the NAN release message broadcast by the mobile phone 100 .
  • the speaker 201 , the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 , and the speaker 205 may respond to the NAN release message after receiving the above-mentioned NAN release message.
  • a device subscribed to the NAN service can reply with a corresponding response message in response to the NAN publication message.
  • the speaker 201, speaker 202, speaker 203, speaker 204, and speaker 205 subscribed to the NAN service receive the NAN release message, they can switch the antenna of the speaker to a weak antenna, and then use the weak antenna to reply to the corresponding response message.
  • the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S507-S508.
  • the speakers (eg, the speakers 201, the speakers 202, the speakers 203, the speakers 204, and the speakers 205) use weak antennas.
  • the speakers use strong antennas to implement wireless communication in the process of executing S501 to S506 .
  • the speaker can use the weak antenna for wireless communication.
  • the strong antenna is the second antenna
  • the weak antenna is the first antenna.
  • the speaker 201 broadcasts the message 1 by using a weak antenna.
  • the message 1 includes the ID 1 and the secret key 1 of the speaker 201.
  • the message 1 is also called a short-range message, such as a short-range message 1 .
  • This message 1 is the first message.
  • the speaker 201 is the first speaker.
  • ID 1 is the identification of the first speaker.
  • Key 1 is the first key.
  • the ID 1 of the speaker 201 is used to identify the speaker 201.
  • the ID 1 of the speaker 201 may be the MAC address of the speaker 201; or, the ID 1 of the speaker 201 may be other identifiers of the speaker 201.
  • the above key 1 may be a key randomly generated by the speaker 201 .
  • the speaker 202 broadcasts the message 2 using a weak antenna.
  • the message 2 includes the ID 2 and the secret key 2 of the speaker 202.
  • the message 2 is also called a short-range message, such as a short-range message 2.
  • This message 2 is the second message.
  • the speaker 202 is the second speaker.
  • ID 2 is the identification of the second speaker.
  • Key 2 is the second key.
  • the ID 2 of the speaker 202 is used to identify the speaker 202 .
  • the ID 2 of the speaker 202 may be the MAC address of the speaker 202; or, the ID 2 of the speaker 202 may be other identifiers of the speaker 202.
  • the above-mentioned secret key 2 may be a secret key randomly generated by the speaker 202 .
  • the short-range message includes the ID of the corresponding speaker and the corresponding secret key.
  • the sound box 201 and the sound box 202 are used as examples to introduce the method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the effective transmission distance of the speaker (such as the speaker 201 or the speaker 202 ) using a weak antenna for wireless communication is the first distance.
  • the effective transmission distance of the speaker (such as the speaker 201 or the speaker 202) using a strong antenna for wireless communication is the second distance.
  • the above-mentioned second distance may be any distance length such as 5 meters, 3 meters, 4 meters or 6 meters.
  • the above-mentioned first distance is a distance length less than 1 meter, such as 0.3 meters, 0.4 meters, or 0.35 meters.
  • the speaker (such as the speaker 201) adopts a strong antenna
  • the speaker 300 can communicate with other devices (such as the mobile phone);
  • the speaker adopts a weak antenna if the distance between the speaker and the mobile phone 100 is smaller than the second distance
  • the distance between the speaker and the mobile phone 100 is smaller than the first distance, and the speaker can communicate with the mobile phone 100 .
  • the effective transmission distance of the speakers is the first distance (eg, 0.3 meters). Only when the distance between other devices (eg, the mobile phone 100 ) and the speaker is less than the first distance, the short-range message sent by the speaker can be received. Other devices whose distance from the speaker is greater than the first distance cannot receive short-range messages sent by the speaker.
  • Such ultra-short-range communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's secret key and interact with the speaker, and can ensure data transmission between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker. security.
  • the user brings the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of character 1 (eg, speaker 201 ).
  • the mobile phone 100 can receive the message 1 sent by the speaker 201 .
  • the mobile phone 100 is not close to the speaker 202 ; therefore, the mobile phone 100 cannot receive the message 2 sent by the speaker 202 .
  • the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S510.
  • the mobile phone 100 receives the message 1, and uses the secret key 1 to encrypt the configuration information 1 to obtain the encrypted information 1.
  • the encrypted information 1 is the first encrypted information.
  • Message 1 includes ID 1 and secret key 1 of speaker 201. After the mobile phone 100 receives the message 1, it can be determined that the ID 1 is the identifier of the speaker of the above-mentioned role 1.
  • the mobile phone 100 may store the correspondence between roles and IDs shown in Table 2.
  • the mobile phone 100 can determine the ID of the speaker corresponding to role 1.
  • the above configuration information 1 may further include role indication information 1, and the role indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is configured as the role 1 (eg, the left front channel).
  • the configuration information 1 is the first configuration information.
  • the role indication information 1 is the first indication information.
  • the above configuration information 1 may include network distribution information 1 .
  • the distribution network information 1 is the first distribution network information.
  • the distribution network information 1 is used to support the speaker 201 to perform data interaction in the combined speaker.
  • the mobile phone 100 sends the encrypted information 1 to the speaker 201 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can send encrypted information 1 to the speaker 201 according to the ID 1 of the speaker 201 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may broadcast a WiFi message including the above-mentioned encrypted information 1 .
  • the above-mentioned key 1 is randomly generated by the speaker 201, and only the mobile phone 100 obtains the above-mentioned key 1 through the message 1; other devices cannot obtain the above-mentioned key 1. Therefore, even if other devices receive the WiFi message including the above-mentioned encrypted information 1, they cannot decrypt the encrypted information 1, and thus cannot obtain the above-mentioned configuration information 1.
  • the speaker 201 receives the encrypted information 1 from the mobile phone 100 , and uses the secret key 1 to decrypt the encrypted information 1 to obtain the configuration information 1 .
  • the speaker 201 sends a prompt message 1.
  • the prompt information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is configured as the character 1 indicated by the configuration information 1 .
  • the speaker 201 can send out the prompt message 1 shown in FIG. 10A , such as “left front channel” 1001 .
  • the speaker 201 may display the light strip corresponding to the above-mentioned character 1, and send out the prompt message 1 through the light strip.
  • the speaker 201 can display the prompt information 1003 shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the above-mentioned prompt information 1 may be voice information.
  • the speaker 201 can issue a voice prompt, such as "the speaker is configured as the left front channel".
  • the above-mentioned prompt information 1 may also be information of "channel has been configured", “channel has been configured", or "role has been configured", which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the speaker 201 uses the distribution network information 1 in the configuration information 1 to interact with other speakers participating in the combination.
  • the above-mentioned distribution network information may be implemented in two different ways.
  • the specific content of the distribution network information is different, and the speaker 201 uses the distribution network information to interact with other speakers participating in the combination in different ways.
  • S514 reference may be made to the relevant content in the following embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the weak antenna can continue to receive the encrypted information 1 from the mobile phone 100.
  • the speaker 202 executes S509, it can continue to use the weak antenna to receive information (eg, encrypted information 2) from the mobile phone 100.
  • speakers may use a strong antenna instead of a weak antenna after sending short-range messages.
  • a strong antenna instead of a weak antenna after sending short-range messages.
  • the speaker 201 after the speaker 201 sends message 1, it can perform S508a, and the weak antenna uses the strong antenna; after the speaker 202 sends the message 2, it can perform S509a, and the weak antenna uses the strong antenna.
  • the speaker 201 can receive the encrypted information 1 from the mobile phone 100 using a strong antenna.
  • the speaker can periodically use the weak antenna and the strong antenna, until the encrypted information from the mobile phone 100 is received, the weak antenna is no longer used.
  • the principle of using a weak antenna and a strong antenna for a sound box in an embodiment of the present application is introduced.
  • the speaker 300 subscribes to the NAN service, if it receives a NAN release message from the mobile phone 100, it can use a weak antenna, and use the weak antenna to broadcast message a.
  • the message a includes the ID of the speaker 300 and the secret key a.
  • the speaker 300 can be switched from a weak antenna to a strong antenna, that is, a strong antenna is used.
  • the speaker 300 can be switched from a strong antenna to a weak antenna (ie, a weak antenna is used), and the weak antenna is used to broadcast the message b.
  • the message b includes the ID of the speaker 300 and the secret key b.
  • the speaker 300 can be switched from a weak antenna to a strong antenna, that is, a strong antenna is used. Until the speaker 300 receives the encrypted information from the mobile phone 100, the speaker 300 will no longer use the weak antenna, that is, it is no longer necessary to use the weak antenna to broadcast short-range messages.
  • the above-mentioned preset duration T1 and preset duration T2 may be the same or different.
  • the speaker 300 can broadcast one or more short-range messages within the preset time period T1 using a weak antenna. Within the same preset duration T1, the secret keys included in the short-range messages broadcast by the speaker 300 may be the same. However, in different preset time lengths T1, the secret keys included in the short-range messages broadcast by the speaker 300 are different.
  • the above-mentioned secret key a and secret key b are both secret keys randomly generated by the speaker 300, and secret key a and secret key b are different.
  • the sound box 300 shown in FIG. 11 may be any sound box among the sound box 201 , the sound box 202 , the sound box 203 , the sound box 204 and the sound box 205 shown in FIG. 8 . That is to say, the speaker 201 , the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 and the speaker 205 can switch between the weak antenna and the strong antenna as shown in FIG. 11 until the encrypted information from the mobile phone 100 is received.
  • the speaker 202 executes S507 to use a weak antenna, and executes S509 to broadcast the short-range message 2 using the weak antenna, because the mobile phone 100 is not close to the speaker 202 ; therefore, the mobile phone 100 cannot receive the information sent by the speaker 202 .
  • Short-range message 2 so the encrypted message cannot be returned to the speaker 202.
  • the speaker 202 can execute S515-S516.
  • the speaker 202 uses a weak antenna.
  • S509a and S515 are optional.
  • the speaker 202 broadcasts the message 3 by using the weak antenna.
  • the message 3 includes the ID 2 and the secret key 3 of the speaker 202.
  • the ID 2 of the speaker 202 is used to identify the speaker 202.
  • the above-mentioned secret key 3 may be a secret key randomly generated by the speaker 202.
  • the above key 3 is different from the key 2.
  • the effective transmission distance of the speaker 202 using the weak antenna for wireless communication is the first distance (eg, 0.3 meters). Only when the distance between other devices (such as the mobile phone 100 ) and the speaker is less than the first distance, the short-range message sent by the speaker 202 can be received. And other devices whose distance from the speaker 202 is greater than the first distance cannot receive the short-range message sent by the speaker 202 .
  • Such ultra-short-distance communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's key to interact with the speaker, and can ensure the data between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker 202. Transmission security.
  • the mobile phone 100 after the mobile phone 100 sends the encrypted information 1 to the speaker 201, another speaker (eg, the speaker 202) participating in the combination can be configured. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 , after S511 , the mobile phone 100 may perform S517 - S519 to configure the speaker 202 .
  • the mobile phone 100 displays a fourth interface.
  • the fourth interface is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 2, so that the distance between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker of the character 2 is within the first distance.
  • character 2 is the second character.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the fourth interface 1201 shown in FIG. 12 .
  • the fourth interface 1201 is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 2 (eg, the right front channel).
  • the fourth interface 1201 includes third prompt information 1202, such as "please move the mobile phone close to the speaker whose role is the right front channel".
  • the role 2 may be the role of any one of the above N speakers.
  • the character 2 is the right front channel
  • the speaker of the character 2 is the speaker 202 shown in FIG. 8 .
  • the user brings the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of character 2 (eg, the speaker 202). After the user places the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker 202 of the character 2 so that the distance between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker 202 is within the first distance, the mobile phone 100 can receive the message 3 sent by the speaker 202 .
  • the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S518 .
  • the mobile phone 100 receives the message 3, and uses the secret key 2 to encrypt the configuration information 2 to obtain the encrypted information 2.
  • the encrypted information 2 is the second encrypted information.
  • This message 3 is the second message or the third message.
  • the short distance 3 includes the ID 2 and the secret key 3 of the speaker 202 .
  • the speaker 202 is the second speaker.
  • ID 2 is the identification of the second speaker.
  • Key 3 is the second key or the third key. After the mobile phone 100 receives the short distance 3, it can be determined that the ID 2 is the identifier of the speaker of the above-mentioned character 2.
  • the mobile phone 100 can store the correspondence between roles and IDs shown in Table 3.
  • the mobile phone 100 can determine the ID of the speaker corresponding to role 2.
  • the above-mentioned configuration information 2 may further include role indication information 2, and the role indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is configured as the role 2 (eg, the right front channel).
  • the configuration information 2 is the second configuration information.
  • the character instruction information 2 is the second instruction information.
  • the above configuration information 2 may include network distribution information 2 .
  • the distribution network information 2 is the second distribution network information.
  • the distribution network information 2 is used to support the speaker 201 to perform data interaction in the combined speaker.
  • the distribution network information 2 reference may be made to the relevant content in the following embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the mobile phone 100 sends the encrypted information 2 to the speaker 202 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can send encrypted information 2 to the speaker 202 according to the ID 2 of the speaker 202 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may broadcast a WiFi message including the above-mentioned encrypted information 2 .
  • the above-mentioned key 3 is randomly generated by the speaker 202, and only the mobile phone 100 obtains the above-mentioned key 3 through the short distance 3; other devices cannot obtain the above-mentioned key 3. Therefore, even if other devices receive the WiFi message including the above-mentioned encrypted information 2, they cannot decrypt the encrypted information 2, and thus cannot obtain the above-mentioned configuration information 2.
  • the speaker 202 receives the encrypted information 2 from the mobile phone 100 , and uses the secret key 3 to decrypt the encrypted information 2 to obtain the configuration information 2 .
  • the speaker 202 sends a prompt message 2 .
  • the prompt information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is configured as the role 2 indicated by the configuration information 2 .
  • the sound box 202 can display the light strip corresponding to the above-mentioned character 2, and send out the prompt message 2 through the light strip.
  • the speaker 201 can display the prompt information 1301 shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the above-mentioned prompt information 2 may be voice information.
  • the speaker 202 can issue a voice prompt, such as "the speaker is configured as the right front channel".
  • the speaker 202 uses the distribution network information 2 in the configuration information 2 to interact with other speakers participating in the combination.
  • the above-mentioned distribution network information may be implemented in two different ways.
  • the specific content of the distribution network information is different, and the speaker 202 uses the distribution network information to interact with other speakers participating in the combination in different ways.
  • S522 reference may be made to the relevant content in the following embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the mobile phone 100 may execute S523 to configure the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 and the speaker 205 .
  • the specific method for configuring the sound box 203, the sound box 204, and the sound box 205 in S523 may refer to the method for configuring the sound box 201 and the sound box 202 in the above-mentioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the ID of the speaker 203 is ID 3
  • the ID of the speaker 204 is ID 4
  • the ID of the speaker 205 is ID 5.
  • the mobile phone 100 can store the correspondence between roles and IDs shown in Table 4.
  • Role ID Role 1 (eg left front channel) ID 1 Role 2 (eg right front channel) ID 2 Character 3 (eg center channel) ID 3 Character 4 (as left surround channel) ID 4 Character 5 (eg right surround channel) ID 5
  • the mobile phone 100 may indicate the placement layout of the N speakers to the user through an interface (eg, the second interface), so that the user may place the N speakers according to the placement layout indicated by the second interface.
  • the placement of the speaker can determine the role of the speaker in the combined speaker.
  • the placement of the speakers is different, and the roles of the speakers in the N speakers participating in the combination are different.
  • the mobile phone 100 may assign roles to each speaker according to the placement positions of the N speakers. In this way, the playback effect of the combined speakers can be improved.
  • the mobile phone 100 can mark the roles of speakers located at different positions on the interface. Then, the mobile phone 100 may sequentially instruct the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of each character through an interface (eg, the third interface or the fourth interface). It can be understood that after the user places the N speakers according to the instructions of the mobile phone 100 , the placement layout of the N speakers is the same as the placement layout of the N speakers participating in the combination on the mobile phone 100 . Therefore, when the mobile phone 100 instructs the user to move the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of a character, the mobile phone 100 can accurately find the speaker corresponding to the character according to the position of the icon of the speaker of the character on the interface.
  • the mobile phone 100 can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, it is possible to solve the problem of incorrect character setting due to the difficulty for the user to distinguish each speaker, and to improve the accuracy of character setting. Moreover, accurately setting the roles of each speaker participating in the combination can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speakers.
  • a speaker uses a weak antenna to broadcast a short-range message including the speaker's ID and secret key.
  • Such ultra-short-range communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's secret key and interact with the speaker, and can ensure data transmission between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker. security.
  • the short-distance message transmission is realized by the mobile phone 100 approaching (eg, touching) the speaker, which is convenient for the user to operate, and can improve the user's operating experience.
  • the mobile phone 100 may configure another speaker (eg, the speaker 202 ) participating in the combination after confirming that the speaker 201 is successfully configured.
  • another speaker eg, the speaker 202
  • the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S1401-S1402; before S523, the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S1403-S1404.
  • the speaker 201 sends a confirmation message 1 to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the confirmation message 1 is the first confirmation message.
  • the confirmation message 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is successfully configured.
  • the speaker 201 may execute S1401 to send the confirmation message 1 to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the speaker 201 can execute S1101 to send the confirmation message 1 to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the user's operation c on the sound box 201 can be received.
  • This operation c is used to confirm that the speaker configuration is complete.
  • the operation c may be a click operation of the user on the “OK” button 1002 shown in FIG. 10A or the “OK” button 1004 shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the speaker 201 may send a confirmation message 1 to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 receives the confirmation message 1 .
  • the mobile phone 100 after the mobile phone 100 receives the confirmation message 1, it can be determined that the configuration of the speaker 201 is successful. At this time, the mobile phone 100 can execute S517-S518. That is, in response to the mobile phone 100 receiving the confirmation message 1, the mobile phone 100 may perform S517-S518.
  • the speaker 202 sends a confirmation message 2 to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the confirmation message 2 is the second confirmation message.
  • the confirmation message 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is successfully configured.
  • the speaker 202 may execute S1403 to send the confirmation message 2 to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the speaker 202 may execute S1403 to send the confirmation message 2 to the mobile phone 100 after executing S521 to send the prompt message 2 .
  • the user's operation c on the speaker 202 can be received.
  • This operation c is used to confirm that the speaker configuration is complete.
  • the operation c may be a click operation of the user on the “OK” button 1302 shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the speaker 202 may send a confirmation message 2 to the mobile phone 100 .
  • the mobile phone 100 receives the confirmation message 2 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may execute S523. That is, in response to the mobile phone 100 receiving the confirmation message 2, the mobile phone 100 may perform S523.
  • This embodiment of the present application introduces the network distribution information in the above configuration information, such as configuration information 1 and configuration information 2 .
  • the above N speakers form a combined speaker in an AP mode in which the main speaker is used as an access point (access point, AP).
  • the speaker 201 shown in FIG. 15 is the master speaker among the N speakers, and the other speakers are slave speakers.
  • the configuration information 1 (that is, the first configuration information) sent by the mobile phone 100 to the speaker 201 (the main speaker) may include: role indication information 1 (that is, the first indication information), identity indication information 1 (that is, the first indication information) second identity information) and distribution network information 1 (ie, the first distribution network information).
  • the above-mentioned role indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is configured as the role 1 (eg, the left front channel).
  • the above-mentioned identity indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is the main speaker.
  • the above-mentioned network distribution information 1 may include: the main speaker (eg, the speaker 201 ) as the first SSID and the first access password of the AP.
  • the first SSID and the first access password may be randomly generated by the mobile phone 100 .
  • the first SSID and the first access password may be randomly generated or preconfigured by the speaker 201 .
  • the mobile phone 100 can receive the first SSID and the first access password from the speaker 201 .
  • the first SSID and the first access password may be carried in the above-mentioned short-range message 1.
  • the speaker 201 after the speaker 201 receives the above configuration information 1, it can be determined that the speaker 201 is the main speaker according to the identity indication information 1 in the configuration information 1. Then, the speaker 201 can act as an access point to generate the first wireless local area network.
  • the SSID of the first wireless local area network is the above-mentioned first SSID
  • the access password of the first wireless local area network is the above-mentioned first access password.
  • the configuration information 2 (that is, the second configuration information) sent by the mobile phone 100 to the speaker 202 (from the speaker) may include: role indication information 2 (that is, the second indication information), identity indication information 2 (that is, the second instruction information) first identity information) and distribution network information 2 (ie, second distribution network information).
  • the above-mentioned role indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is configured as the role 2 (eg, the right front channel).
  • the above-mentioned identity indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is a slave speaker.
  • the above-mentioned network distribution information 2 may include: the first SSID and the first access password of the AP to be accessed from the speaker (eg, the speaker 202 ).
  • the speaker 202 after the speaker 202 receives the above configuration information 2, it can be determined that the speaker 202 is a slave speaker according to the identity indication information 2 in the configuration information 2. Then, the speaker 202 can access the above-mentioned first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password.
  • the construction of the above-mentioned combined speaker can be completed.
  • the main speaker (such as the speaker 201) can also be connected to the network to realize the interaction between the speaker and the cloud device.
  • the mobile phone 100 may also send the SSID (denoted as the second SSID) and the access password (denoted as the second access password) of the router 1500 shown in FIG. 15 to the main speaker (eg, the speaker 201 ).
  • the foregoing network configuration information 1 may further include a second SSID and a second access password.
  • the speaker 201 After the speaker 201 receives the above configuration information 1, it can be determined that the speaker 201 is the main speaker according to the identity indication information 1 in the configuration information 1. Then, the speaker 201 can access the second wireless local area network provided by the router 1500 according to the second SSID and the second access password.
  • the foregoing network configuration information 1 does not include the second SSID and the second access password.
  • the mobile phone 100 can encrypt the second SSID and the second access password using the above-mentioned secret key 1 to obtain encrypted information 4 ; then, send the encrypted information 4 to the speaker 201 .
  • the speaker 201 After the speaker 201 receives the encrypted information 4, it can use the secret key 1 to decrypt the encrypted information 4 to obtain the second SSID and the second access password;
  • the second wireless local area network is another wireless local area network.
  • the speaker 201 can be connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router 1500 as the main speaker, and interact with the cloud device through the router 1500 .
  • other speakers eg, speaker 202 , speaker 203 , speaker 204 or speaker 205
  • speaker 201 can be connected to the first wireless local area network provided by speaker 201 as a slave speaker.
  • the above N speakers form a combined speaker in a non-AP mode.
  • the speaker 201 shown in FIG. 16 is the master speaker among the N speakers, and the other speakers are slave speakers.
  • the configuration information 1 sent by the mobile phone 100 to the speaker 201 may include: role indication information 1 , identity indication information 1 and distribution network information 1 .
  • the above-mentioned role indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is configured as the role 1 (eg, the left front channel).
  • the above-mentioned identity indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is the main speaker.
  • the above-mentioned network distribution information 1 may include: the SSID of the router 1500 (denoted as the second SSID) and the access password (denoted as the second access password). After the speaker 201 receives the above configuration information 1, it can be determined that the speaker 201 is the main speaker according to the identity indication information 1 in the configuration information 1.
  • the speaker 201 accesses the above-mentioned second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password.
  • the configuration information 2 sent by the mobile phone 100 to the speaker 202 may include: role indication information 2 , identity indication information 2 and distribution network information 2 .
  • the above-mentioned role indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is configured as the role 2 (eg, the right front channel).
  • the above-mentioned identity indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is a slave speaker.
  • the foregoing network distribution information 2 may include: a second SSID and a second access password.
  • the construction of the above-mentioned combined speaker can be completed.
  • the speaker 201 is used as the master speaker, and the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 or the speaker 205 as the slave speakers can access the second wireless local area network provided by the router 1500 .
  • the master speaker eg, the speaker 201
  • the slave speaker perform data transmission through the router 1500 .
  • the main speaker can also interact with the cloud device through the router 1500.
  • the above-mentioned N speakers form a combined speaker in an AP mode or a non-AP mode, which is pre-configured before the speaker leaves the factory.
  • the above-mentioned first APP is also pre-configured with the content of the configuration information that the mobile phone 100 needs to send to the speaker.
  • the above-mentioned N speakers may be selected by the user to form a combined speaker in AP mode or non-AP mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a fifth interface.
  • the fifth interface is used to prompt the user to select a mode in which the above-mentioned N speakers form a combined speaker.
  • the modes in which the N speakers form a combined speaker may include an AP mode and a non-AP mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the fifth interface 1701 shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the fifth interface 1701 includes an "AP Mode” option 1702 and a "Non-AP Mode” option 1703 .
  • the fifth interface 1701 also includes prompt information for introducing the above AP mode and non-AP mode, such as prompt information "In AP mode, the main speaker is used as a hotspot, and the speaker is connected to the wireless LAN provided by the main speaker” 1704 and prompt information " In non-AP mode, both the main speaker and the slave speakers are connected to the wireless LAN provided by the router"1705.
  • prompt information for introducing the above AP mode and non-AP mode, such as prompt information "In AP mode, the main speaker is used as a hotspot, and the speaker is connected to the wireless LAN provided by the main speaker” 1704 and prompt information " In non-AP mode, both the main speaker and the slave speakers are connected to the wireless LAN provided by the router"1705.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the second interface. Then, when the mobile phone 100 executes S510, the encrypted information 1 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 1 described in the first application scenario with the secret key 1. When the mobile phone 100 executes S518, the encrypted information 2 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 2 described in the first application scenario with the secret key 3.
  • the sound box (such as the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 ) can also interact with other sound boxes participating in the combination in the manner described in the first scenario above.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the second interface. Then, when the mobile phone 100 executes S510, the encrypted information 1 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 1 described in the second application scenario above with the secret key 1. When the mobile phone 100 executes S518, the encrypted information 2 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 2 described in the second application scenario above with the secret key 3.
  • the sound box (such as the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 ) can also interact with other sound boxes participating in the combination in the manner described in the second scenario above.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the fifth interface.
  • the fifth interface is used to prompt the user to select a mode in which the above-mentioned N speakers form a combined speaker.
  • the modes in which the N speakers form a combined speaker may include an AP mode and a non-AP mode.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the fifth interface 1701 shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the fifth interface 1701 includes an "AP Mode” option 1702 and a “Non-AP Mode” option 1703 .
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a third interface. Then, when the mobile phone 100 executes S510, the encrypted information 1 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 1 described in the first application scenario with the secret key 1. When the mobile phone 100 executes S518, the encrypted information 2 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 2 described in the first application scenario with the secret key 3.
  • the sound box (such as the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 ) can also interact with other sound boxes participating in the combination in the manner described in the first scenario above.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display a third interface. Then, when the mobile phone 100 executes S510, the encrypted information 1 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 1 described in the second application scenario above with the secret key 1. When the mobile phone 100 executes S518, the encrypted information 2 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 2 described in the second application scenario above with the secret key 3.
  • the sound box (such as the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 ) can also interact with other sound boxes participating in the combination in the manner described in the second scenario above.
  • the user may choose to construct the combined speaker in the AP mode or the non-AP mode.
  • a combined speaker can be constructed according to the user's preference, which can improve the user's experience.
  • the main speaker may be randomly selected by the mobile phone 100 from the above N speakers.
  • the mobile phone 100 may select the speaker of the left front channel as the main speaker.
  • the role of the main speaker among the above N speakers is fixed and may be pre-configured in the first APP.
  • the speaker of the left channel can be the main speaker.
  • the center channel speaker may be the main speaker.
  • the speaker of the left front channel is the main speaker as an example.
  • the mobile phone 100 may also send the speaker key and certificate for the combined speaker to perform data interaction to the master speaker and the slave speaker.
  • the above configuration information 1 and configuration information 2 may further include a speaker key and a certificate for combining speakers to perform data interaction.
  • the speaker key is used to encrypt the interactive data between the master speaker and the slave speaker
  • the certificate is used to represent the identity of the speaker, for example, the speaker is a member of the combined speaker.
  • the mobile phone 100 may send encrypted information (eg, encrypted information 1) to the speaker (eg, speaker 201 ), or after receiving a confirmation message (eg, confirmation message 1 ) from the speaker (eg, speaker 201 ) , encrypt the above-mentioned speaker key and certificate by using the key (such as key 1) transmitted by the speaker through the short-distance message, and then send the encrypted information to the speaker (such as the speaker 201).
  • the speaker eg, speaker 201
  • it can decrypt the information to obtain the speaker key and certificate.
  • the master speaker and the slave speaker in the combination speaker may periodically negotiate and update the speaker key and certificate. In this way, the information security in the process of data interaction between the master speaker and the slave speaker can be improved.
  • the master speaker and the slave speaker can negotiate and update the speaker key and certificate through the first wireless local area network.
  • the master speaker and the slave speaker can negotiate and update the speaker keys and credentials through the second wireless local area network.
  • the mobile phone 100 may also indicate to the master speaker the role of each slave speaker. For example, the mobile phone 100 may send the ID and role of each slave speaker to the master speaker among the N speakers, and their corresponding relationship (as shown in Table 4, the corresponding relationship between roles and IDs).
  • the above configuration information 1 may include the IDs and roles of each slave speaker, and their corresponding relationships.
  • the IDs and roles of each slave speaker, and their corresponding relationships may not be included in the configuration information 1 above.
  • the mobile phone 100 sends encrypted information (such as encrypted information 1) to the speaker (such as the speaker 201), or receives a confirmation message (such as confirmation message 1) from the speaker (such as the speaker 201), the mobile phone 100 can use the speaker to pass the short-distance message.
  • the transmitted secret key eg, secret key 1
  • the speaker eg, speaker 201
  • the mobile phone 100 may broadcast the NAN release message in response to the user's operation a on the first interface. Instead of responding to the user's operation b on the second interface, the NAN publishing message is broadcast.
  • the above S504 may be replaced by S1801 shown in FIG. 18
  • the above S505 may be replaced by S1802 shown in FIG. 18 .
  • the mobile phone 100 broadcasts the NAN release message.
  • the mobile phone 100 in response to the user's operation a on the first interface, can not only execute the operation of "displaying the second interface" in S503, but also execute S1801.
  • the third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 1, so that the distance between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker of the character 1 is within the first distance.
  • the mobile phone 100 may perform S503 shown in FIG. 18 to display the second interface shown in FIG. 7B or 7C 704, and execute S1801 shown in FIG. 18, as shown in FIG. 19, publish the NAN service (that is, broadcast the NAN publishing message).
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the third interface shown in FIG. 9A or 9B.
  • the mobile phone 100 may publish the NAN service in response to the user's operation b on the second interface, or publish the NAN service in response to the user's operation a on the first interface. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the above-mentioned electronic devices such as mobile phones
  • speakers include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Experts may use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • functional modules can be divided into the electronic device (such as a mobile phone) and a speaker according to the above method examples.
  • each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one in the processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that, the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division manners in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 20 shows a possible schematic structural diagram of the electronic device (eg, the mobile phone 100 ) and the sound box involved in the above embodiment.
  • the electronic device 2010 may include a sound box combination management module 2011 ;
  • the sound box 2020 may include an ultra-short-range module 2021 and a combination module 2022 ;
  • the sound box 2030 may include an ultra-short-range module 2031 and a combination module 2032 .
  • the speaker combination management module 2011 is used to guide the user to add each speaker to the combination and specify a role, and transmit the configuration information to the speaker 2020 and the speaker 2030 .
  • the speaker combination management module 2011 is used to support the electronic device 2010 to perform S502, S503, S504, S505, S510, S511, S517, S518, S519, S523, S1402, S1404, S1801, S1802, and/or use Other procedures for the techniques described herein.
  • the ultra-short-range module 2021 is used for sending short-range messages to the electronic device 2010 at a safe distance.
  • the ultra-short-range module 2021 is used to support the speaker 2020 to perform S508 in the above examples, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the combination module 2022 is used to process the data transmission between the speakers and play the data of the corresponding channel according to the role of the speakers.
  • the combination module 2022 is used to support the speaker 2020 to perform S501, S506, S507, S508a, S512, S513, S514, S1401 in the above examples, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the ultra-short-range module 2031 is used for sending short-range messages to the electronic device 2010 at a safe distance.
  • the ultra-short-range module 2031 is used to support the loudspeaker 2020 to perform S509, S516 in the above examples, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the combination module 2032 is used to process the data transmission between the speakers and play the data of the corresponding channel according to the role of the speakers.
  • the combination module 2032 is used to support the speaker 2030 to perform S501, S506, S507, S509a, S515, S516a, S520, S521, S522, S1403, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein in the above examples.
  • the functions of the speaker combination management module 2011 of the electronic device 2010 can be integrated into the processing module, the display module and the communication module.
  • the function of the ultra-short-range module 2021 of the above-mentioned speaker 2020 may be integrated into the communication module, and the function of the combination module 2022 may be integrated into the processing module and the communication module.
  • the function of the ultra-short-range module 2031 of the above-mentioned speaker 2030 can be integrated into the communication module, and the function of the combination module 2032 can be integrated into the processing module and the communication module.
  • the speaker 2020 and the speaker 2030 may further include a display module, and the display module is used to display prompt information (eg, prompt information 1 or prompt information 2).
  • the unit modules of the electronic device 2010, the sound box 2020 and the sound box 2030 include but are not limited to the above-mentioned processing module, display module and communication module.
  • the electronic device 2010, the sound box 2020, and the sound box 2030 may also include a storage module.
  • the processing module may be one or more processors (the processor 110 shown in FIG. 2), and the communication module includes a wireless communication module (the wireless communication module 160 shown in FIG. 2).
  • the wireless communication module may be referred to as a communication interface.
  • the storage module may be a memory (the internal memory 121 shown in FIG. 2 ).
  • the display module may be a display screen (display screen 194 shown in FIG. 2 ).
  • the above-mentioned one or more processors, wireless communication modules, memory and display screen, etc. can be connected together, for example, connected by a bus.
  • the memory described above is used to store computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions.
  • the electronic device 2010 can execute various functions or steps executed by the mobile phone 100 in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the structure of the electronic device 2010 may refer to the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the processing module may be one or more processors (such as the processor 3001 shown in FIG. 3 ), and the communication module includes a wireless communication module (shown in FIG. 3 ) wireless communication module 308).
  • the wireless communication module may be referred to as a communication interface.
  • the storage module may be a memory (internal memory 303 as shown in FIG. 3 ).
  • the display module may be a display screen (display screen 306 shown in FIG. 3 ).
  • the above-mentioned one or more processors, wireless communication modules, memory and display screen, etc. can be connected together, for example, connected by a bus.
  • the memory described above is used to store computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions.
  • the sound box can perform various functions or steps performed by the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 in the above method embodiments.
  • the structure of the sound box may refer to the structure of the sound box 300 shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the chip system 2100 includes at least one processor 2101 and at least one interface circuit 2102 .
  • the processor 2101 and the interface circuit 2102 can be interconnected by wires.
  • the interface circuit 2102 may be used to receive signals from other devices, such as electronics or the memory of a speaker.
  • the interface circuit 2102 may be used to send signals to other devices (eg, the processor 2101 of an electronic device or a speaker).
  • the interface circuit 2102 can read the instructions stored in the memory and send the instructions to the processor 2101 .
  • the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device (such as the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2) can be made to execute various steps of the mobile phone 100 in the above embodiment.
  • the sound box (the sound box 300 shown in FIG. 3 ) can be caused to perform each step of the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions are executed on the above electronic device (the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 ), the electronic device is made to execute the above Each function or step performed by the mobile phone 100 in the method embodiment.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, enables the computer to perform each function or step performed by the mobile phone 100 in the above method embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions are executed on the above-mentioned sound box (the sound box 300 shown in FIG. 3 ), the sound box is made to execute the above method embodiments Each function or step performed by the speaker 201 or the speaker 202.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, enables the computer to execute each function or step performed by the speaker 201 or the speaker 202 in the above method embodiments.
  • the electronic device may include: the above-mentioned touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors.
  • the touch screen, memory and processor are coupled.
  • the memory is used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions.
  • the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device can execute various functions or steps executed by the mobile phone in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the structure of the electronic device reference may be made to the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • inventions of the present application provide a display device, which is characterized in that the device can be applied to an electronic device including the above-mentioned touch screen.
  • the apparatus is configured to perform each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the above method embodiments.
  • the chip system includes at least one processor 1501 and at least one interface circuit 1502 .
  • the processor 1501 and the interface circuit 1502 may be interconnected by wires.
  • the interface circuit 1502 may be used to receive signals from other devices, such as the memory of an electronic device.
  • the interface circuit 1502 may be used to send signals to other devices (eg, the processor 1501).
  • the interface circuit 1502 may read the instructions stored in the memory and send the instructions to the processor 1501 .
  • the electronic device can be caused to perform the various steps in the above embodiments.
  • the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions are executed on the above-mentioned electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above-mentioned method embodiments .
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, enables the computer to perform various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above method embodiments.
  • the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be Incorporation may either be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components shown as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, which are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions to make a device (may be a single chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Abstract

A combined loudspeaker box configuration method, a loudspeaker box and an electronic device, relating to the field of communication technology. The present invention improves the accuracy of role settings by setting, in an intuitive manner, the roles of loudspeaker boxes participating in combination. The electronic device displays a first interface for constructing an N-channel combined loudspeaker box; in response to a first operation on the first interface, a second interface is displayed, the second interface indicating the placement layout of N loudspeaker boxes of the N channels; in response to a second operation on the second interface, an NAN publishing message is broadcast and a third interface is displayed, the third interface making a prompt that the electronic device is enabled to be in proximity to a loudspeaker box of a first role among the N loudspeaker boxes and indicating the role of each loudspeaker box; a first message, from the first loudspeaker box, comprising the identifier of the first loudspeaker box and a first key is received; and first encrypted information is sent to the first loudspeaker box, the first encrypted information being encrypted using the first key and comprising first indication information indicating that the first loudspeaker box is configured with the first role and first network configuration information supporting interaction of the N loudspeaker boxes.

Description

一种组合音箱的配置方法、音箱和电子设备A configuration method of a combined sound box, a sound box and an electronic device
本申请要求于2020年09月14日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202010963117.5、发明名称为“一种组合音箱的配置方法、音箱和电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed on September 14, 2020 with the State Intellectual Property Office, the application number is 202010963117.5, and the invention name is "a configuration method of a combined speaker, a speaker and an electronic device", the entire content of which is approved by Reference is incorporated in this application.
技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种组合音箱的配置方法、音箱和电子设备。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a configuration method of a combined sound box, a sound box, and an electronic device.
背景技术Background technique
随着音频技术的发展,用户对音频设备(如音箱)的音频播放效果的要求越来越高。为了提升音频播放效果,很多用户将多个音箱构建为组合音箱使用。其中,由多个音箱构建而成的组合音箱可以播放多声道音频(如立体声或环绕声)产生混响效果,可以给用户带来身临其境的感觉。With the development of audio technology, users have higher and higher requirements on the audio playback effect of audio equipment (such as speakers). In order to improve the audio playback effect, many users build multiple speakers as a combination speaker. Among them, a combined speaker constructed from multiple speakers can play multi-channel audio (such as stereo or surround sound) to produce a reverberation effect, which can bring users an immersive feeling.
在构建组合音箱的过程中,需要指定参与组合的音箱,并分别指定每个音箱的角色(如左声道、右声道、左环绕声道或右环绕声道等)。并且,还需要分别为每个音箱配置配网信息。例如,该配网信息可以包括:音箱需要接入的无线局域网的服务集标识(service set identifier,SSID)和接入密码、用于指示音箱角色的指示信息,以及音箱间进行数据传输的认证凭证和秘钥等。In the process of building a combined speaker, it is necessary to specify the speakers participating in the combination, and specify the role of each speaker (such as left channel, right channel, left surround channel or right surround channel, etc.). In addition, it is also necessary to configure the distribution network information for each speaker separately. For example, the network distribution information may include: a service set identifier (SSID) and an access password of the wireless local area network to which the speakers need to access, indication information for indicating the role of the speakers, and authentication credentials for data transmission between speakers and key etc.
目前,构建组合音箱的方案中,可以由用户在电子设备(如手机)的音箱应用(application,APP)中手动设置每个音箱的角色;并由用户手动操作音箱APP,控制手机逐个向每个音箱发送对应的配网信息,以构建组合音箱。At present, in the scheme of building a combined speaker, the user can manually set the role of each speaker in the speaker application (APP) of an electronic device (such as a mobile phone); and the user can manually operate the speaker APP to control the mobile phone to each speaker one by one. The speaker sends the corresponding distribution network information to construct a combined speaker.
但是,在参与组合的音箱的外形基本一样的情况下,由用户手动设置每个音箱的角色,可能会因为用户难以区分各个音箱而导致角色设置错误,影响组合音箱的音频播放效果。However, in the case that the shapes of the speakers participating in the combination are basically the same, the role of each speaker is manually set by the user, which may cause errors in the role setting because it is difficult for the user to distinguish each speaker, which affects the audio playback effect of the combined speakers.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请提供一种组合音箱的配置方法、音箱和电子设备,可以通过直观的方式设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色,可以提升角色设置的准确率,进而可以提升组合音箱播放音频的效果。The present application provides a configuration method of a combined speaker, a speaker and an electronic device, which can set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner, which can improve the accuracy of the role setting, thereby improving the effect of the combined speaker playing audio.
第一方面,本申请提供一种组合音箱的配置方法,该方法用于电子设备配置组合音箱,该电子设备中安装有第一应用APP。该组合音箱包括多个音箱,每个音箱包括第一天线和第二天线。第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,第二天线的发射距离为第二距离。该第一距离小于第二距离。In a first aspect, the present application provides a configuration method of a combined sound box, the method is used for configuring a combined sound box in an electronic device, and a first application APP is installed in the electronic device. The combined sound box includes a plurality of sound boxes, and each sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna. The transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance. The first distance is smaller than the second distance.
其中,电子设备可以显示第一APP的第一界面。该第一界面用于触发电子设备构建N声道的组合音箱,N≥2,N为正整数。响应于用户在第一界面的第一操作,电子设备可以显示第二界面。该第二界面用于指示N声道的N个音箱的摆放布局。该N个音箱中每个音箱的角色由N个音箱的摆放布局决定。例如,以N=5为例,5个音箱可以构建包括左前置声道、右前置声道、中置声道、右环绕声道、左环绕声道的环绕声 的组合音箱。这5个音箱中不同角色的音箱的摆放位置不同。The electronic device may display the first interface of the first APP. The first interface is used to trigger the electronic device to construct an N-channel combined speaker, where N≥2, and N is a positive integer. In response to the user's first operation on the first interface, the electronic device may display the second interface. The second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels. The role of each speaker in the N speakers is determined by the arrangement of the N speakers. For example, taking N=5 as an example, 5 speakers can construct a combined speaker including the left front channel, the right front channel, the center channel, the right surround channel, and the surround sound of the left surround channel. The placement of speakers for different roles in these five speakers is different.
响应于用户在第二界面的第二操作,电子设备可以广播临近感知网络(neighborhood aware network,NAN)发布消息。其中,该NAN发布消息用于指示订阅NAN服务的音箱使用第一天线。电子设备可以显示第三界面。该第三界面用于提示用户将电子设备靠近N个音箱中第一角色的音箱,使电子设备与第一角色的音箱之间的距离在第一距离内。该第三界面还用于指示N个音箱中包括第一角色的音箱在内的一个或多个音箱的角色。这样,用户便可以明确当前正在配置的音箱的角色为第一角色。In response to the user's second operation on the second interface, the electronic device may broadcast a proximity awareness network (NAN) release message. The NAN release message is used to instruct the speaker subscribed to the NAN service to use the first antenna. The electronic device may display the third interface. The third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the first role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the first role is within the first distance. The third interface is also used to indicate the roles of one or more loudspeakers including the loudspeaker of the first role among the N loudspeakers. In this way, the user can make it clear that the role of the speaker currently being configured is the first role.
上述N个音箱中的第一音箱接收到NAN发布消息,响应于NAN发布消息,第一音箱可以使用第一天线广播第一消息。其中,用户按照上述第三界面的指示持电子设备靠近上述N个音箱中第一角色的音箱后,该电子设备便可以接收到来自第一音箱的第一消息。该第一消息包括第一音箱的标识和第一秘钥。然后,电子设备可以向第一音箱发送第一加密信息。该第一加密信息是采用第一秘钥加密第一配置信息得到的。该第一配置信息包括第一配网信息和第一指示信息。该第一指示信息用于指示第一音箱被配置为第一角色,第一配网信息用于支持第一音箱与N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。The first speaker among the above N speakers receives the NAN release message, and in response to the NAN release message, the first speaker may use the first antenna to broadcast the first message. The electronic device can receive the first message from the first speaker after the user holds the electronic device close to the speaker of the first role among the N speakers according to the instructions of the third interface. The first message includes the identification of the first speaker and the first secret key. Then, the electronic device can send the first encrypted information to the first sound box. The first encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the first configuration information with the first secret key. The first configuration information includes first distribution network information and first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the first role, and the first distribution network information is used to support interaction between the first speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
采用本申请的方案,电子设备可以以直观的方式支持用户设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色。这样,便可以解决由于用户难以区分各个音箱而导致角色设置错误的问题,可以提升角色设置的准确率。并且,准确设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色,可以提升组合音箱的音频播放效果。With the solution of the present application, the electronic device can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, it is possible to solve the problem of incorrect character setting due to the difficulty for the user to distinguish each speaker, and to improve the accuracy of character setting. Moreover, accurately setting the roles of each speaker participating in the combination can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speakers.
并且,音箱使用第一天线(即弱天线)进行无线通信的有效传输距离为第一距离(如0.3米)。只有当电子设备与音箱之间的距离小于第一距离,才可以接收到音箱发送的短距消息。而其他与音箱之间距离大于第一距离的设备,则不能接收到音箱发送的短距消息。Moreover, the effective transmission distance of the speaker using the first antenna (ie, the weak antenna) for wireless communication is the first distance (eg, 0.3 meters). Only when the distance between the electronic device and the speaker is less than the first distance, the short-range message sent by the speaker can be received. And other devices whose distance from the speaker is greater than the first distance cannot receive short-range messages sent by the speaker.
这样的超短距离通信,可以保证音箱发送的短距消息不被其他设备接收到,可以避免由于其他设备获取到音箱的秘钥与音箱交互从而操作音箱,可以保证电子设备与音箱之间数据传输的安全性。Such ultra-short-range communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's secret key and interact with the speaker, and can ensure data transmission between the electronic device and the speaker. security.
在第一方面的一种可能的设计方式中,上述N个音箱中的第二音箱也可以接收到NAN发布消息,响应于NAN发布消息,该第二音箱使用第一天线广播第二消息。电子设备可以显示第四界面。该第四界面用于提示用户将电子设备靠近N个音箱中第二角色的音箱,使电子设备与第二角色的音箱之间的距离在第一距离内。其中,第四界面还用于指示N个音箱中包括第二角色的音箱在内的一个或多个音箱的角色。这样,用户便可以明确当前正在配置的音箱的角色为第二角色。In a possible design of the first aspect, the second speaker among the above N speakers can also receive the NAN release message, and in response to the NAN release message, the second speaker broadcasts the second message using the first antenna. The electronic device may display the fourth interface. The fourth interface is used for prompting the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the second role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the second role is within the first distance. Wherein, the fourth interface is further used to indicate the roles of one or more speakers including the speakers of the second role among the N speakers. In this way, the user can make it clear that the role of the speaker currently being configured is the second role.
用户按照上述第四界面的指示持电子设备靠近上述N个音箱中第一角色的音箱后,该电子设备便可以接收到来自第二音箱的第二消息。该第一消息包括第二音箱的标识和第二秘钥。然后,电子设备可以向第二音箱发送第二加密信息。该第二加密信息是采用第二秘钥加密第二配置信息得到的。该第二配置信息包括第二配网信息和第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示第二音箱被配置为第二角色,第二配网信息用于支持第二音箱与N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。After the user holds the electronic device close to the speaker of the first role among the N speakers according to the instructions of the fourth interface, the electronic device can receive the second message from the second speaker. The first message includes the identification of the second speaker and the second secret key. Then, the electronic device can send the second encrypted information to the second sound box. The second encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the second configuration information with the second secret key. The second configuration information includes second network distribution information and second indication information. The second indication information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as the second role, and the second distribution network information is used to support the interaction between the second speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
其中,电子设备向第一音箱发送第一加密信息之后,便完成了第一角色的音箱的 配置工作。此时,电子设备可以显示第四界面,提示用户持电子设备靠近第二角色的音箱,以配置该第二角色的音箱。采用本申请的方案,电子设备可以以直观的方式支持用户设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色。这样,可以提升角色设置的准确率。并且,采用超短距离通信,可以保证电子设备与音箱之间数据传输的安全性。Wherein, after the electronic device sends the first encrypted information to the first speaker, the configuration of the speaker of the first role is completed. At this time, the electronic device may display a fourth interface, prompting the user to hold the electronic device close to the speaker of the second character to configure the speaker of the second character. With the solution of the present application, the electronic device can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, the accuracy of character setting can be improved. Moreover, the use of ultra-short-distance communication can ensure the security of data transmission between electronic devices and speakers.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,电子设备向第一音箱发送第一加密信息之后,该电子设备可能会接收到来自第一音箱的第一确认消息,该第一确认消息用于指示第一音箱配置成功。上述电子设备显示第四界面,具体可以包括:电子设备接收到第一确认消息后,显示第四界面。也就是说,电子设备可以在确定一个角色(如第一角色)的音箱配置完成后,再配置下一个角色(如第二角色)的音箱。In another possible design of the first aspect, after the electronic device sends the first encrypted information to the first sound box, the electronic device may receive a first confirmation message from the first sound box, and the first confirmation message uses to indicate that the first speaker configuration is successful. The above-mentioned electronic device displaying the fourth interface may specifically include: after the electronic device receives the first confirmation message, displaying the fourth interface. That is to say, the electronic device may configure the speakers of the next role (eg, the second role) after determining that the speaker configuration of one role (eg, the first role) is completed.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述N个音箱可以以主音箱作为接入点(access point,AP)的AP模式构成组合音箱。也就是说,N个音箱中的主音箱可以作为AP提供无线局域网(如第一无线局域网),N个音箱中的从音箱可以接入该主音箱提供的第一无线局域网。该N个音箱可以通过该第一无线局域网交互。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, the above N speakers may form a combined speaker in an AP mode in which the main speaker is used as an access point (access point, AP). That is to say, the master speaker in the N speakers can serve as an AP to provide a wireless local area network (eg, the first wireless local area network), and the slave speakers in the N speakers can access the first wireless local area network provided by the master speaker. The N speakers can interact through the first wireless local area network.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第二配置信息还可以包括第一身份信息。该第一身份信息用于指示第二音箱被配置为从音箱,还用于指示第二音箱接入主音箱作为AP提供第一无线局域网。上述第二配网信息可以包括:第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码。这样,从音箱(如第二音箱)便可以根据第一SSID和第一接入密码接入主音箱提供第一无线局域网,便可以通过第一无线局域网与主音箱交互。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, in a scenario where a combined speaker is constructed in an AP mode, the above-mentioned second configuration information may further include first identity information. The first identity information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and is also used to instruct the second speaker to access the master speaker as an AP to provide the first wireless local area network. The foregoing second network configuration information may include: a first SSID and a first access password of the first wireless local area network. In this way, the slave speaker (such as the second speaker) can access the master speaker to provide the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password, and can interact with the master speaker through the first wireless local area network.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息。该第而身份信息用于指示第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示第一音箱作为AP提供第一无线局域网。上述第一配网信息包括:第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码。这样,主音箱(如第一音箱)便可以提供第一无线局域网,并由从音箱根据该第一SSID和第一接入密码接入该第一无线局域网,然后通过第一无线局域网与组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, in a scenario in which a combined speaker is constructed in an AP mode, the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information. The second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the main speaker, and is also used to instruct the first speaker to provide the first wireless local area network as an AP. The above-mentioned first network distribution information includes: the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network. In this way, the master speaker (such as the first speaker) can provide the first wireless local area network, and the slave speaker can access the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password, and then connect to the combined speaker through the first wireless local area network. interact with other speakers.
在这种设计方式中,主音箱提供的第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码,可以是由电子设备指定的。In this design manner, the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network provided by the main speaker may be specified by the electronic device.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,主音箱提供的第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码,可以是电子设备从主音箱获取到的。具体的,上述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息。该第二身份信息用于指示第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示第一音箱作为AP提供第一无线局域网。上述方法还包括:电子设备从第一音箱获取第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码。In another possible design method of the first aspect, in the scenario of constructing a combined speaker in AP mode, the first SSID and first access password of the first wireless local area network provided by the main speaker may be the electronic device from the main speaker. obtained from the speakers. Specifically, the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information. The second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the main speaker, and is also used to instruct the first speaker to provide the first wireless local area network as an AP. The above method further includes: the electronic device obtains the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network from the first sound box.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第一身份信息还用于指示第一音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网。In another possible design of the first aspect, in the scenario of constructing a combined speaker in AP mode, the above-mentioned first identity information is also used to instruct the first speaker to access the second wireless local area network provided by the router.
其中,电子设备可以通过上述第一配网信息,向主音箱(如第一音箱)指示第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。具体的,第一配网信息还包括:第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。The electronic device may indicate the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network to the main speaker (eg, the first speaker) through the above-mentioned first network distribution information. Specifically, the first network distribution information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
或者,电子设备可以采用上述第一秘钥加密该第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码得到的,得到第三加密信息。然后,向第一音箱发送该第三加密信息。Alternatively, the electronic device may obtain the third encrypted information by encrypting the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network by using the above-mentioned first secret key. Then, the third encrypted information is sent to the first speaker.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述N个音箱可以以非AP模式构成组合音箱。具体的,N个音箱(包括主音箱和从音箱)可以接入路由器提供无线局域网(如第二无线局域网)。该N个音箱可以通过该第二无线局域网交互。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, the above-mentioned N sound boxes may form a combined sound box in a non-AP mode. Specifically, N speakers (including master speakers and slave speakers) can be connected to a router to provide a wireless local area network (eg, a second wireless local area network). The N speakers can interact through the second wireless local area network.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以非AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第二配置信息还包括第一身份信息。该第一身份信息用于指示第二音箱被配置为从音箱,还用于指示第二音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网。上述第二配网信息包括:第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。这样,从音箱(如第二音箱)便可以根据第二SSID和第二接入密码接入路由器提供第二无线局域网,便可以与主音箱交互。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, in a scenario where the combined speaker is constructed in a non-AP mode, the above-mentioned second configuration information further includes first identity information. The first identity information is used to indicate that the second sound box is configured as a slave sound box, and is also used to indicate that the second sound box is connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router. The above-mentioned second network distribution information includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network. In this way, the slave speaker (such as the second speaker) can access the router to provide the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and can interact with the master speaker.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以非AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息。该第二身份信息用于指示第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示第一音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网。上述第一配网信息还包括:第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。这样,主音箱(如第一音箱)便可以根据第二SSID和第二接入密码接入路由器提供第二无线局域网,便可以与从音箱交互。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, in a scenario where a combined speaker is constructed in a non-AP mode, the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information. The second identity information is used to indicate that the first sound box is configured as the main sound box, and is also used to indicate that the first sound box is connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router. The above-mentioned first network distribution information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network. In this way, the master speaker (such as the first speaker) can access the router to provide the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and can then interact with the slave speaker.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式或非AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,电子设备还可以向主音箱指示各个从音箱的标识和角色。具体的,上述方法还可以包括:电子设备向第一音箱发送第二音箱的标识和第二指示信息。这样,主音箱便可以按照各个从音箱的标识和角色与从音箱交互,有利于保证各个音箱按照正确的角色播放音箱,可以提升组合音箱的音频播放效果。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, in the scenario of constructing a combined speaker in AP mode or non-AP mode, the electronic device may also indicate the identity and role of each slave speaker to the master speaker. Specifically, the above method may further include: the electronic device sends the identification of the second sound box and the second indication information to the first sound box. In this way, the master speaker can interact with the slave speakers according to the identification and role of each slave speaker, which is beneficial to ensure that each speaker plays the speaker according to the correct role, and can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speaker.
在第一方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第二配置信息还包括用于N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证。上述第一配置信息还包括用于N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证。这样,第一音箱与第二音箱可以根据音箱秘钥和凭证通过第一音箱提供的第一无线局域网交互。其中,音箱之间采用音箱秘钥和凭证进行数据交互,可以提升组合音箱之间进行数据传输的安全性。In another possible design manner of the first aspect, the above-mentioned second configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate for the interaction of the N speakers. The above-mentioned first configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate for the interaction of the N speakers. In this way, the first speaker and the second speaker can interact through the first wireless local area network provided by the first speaker according to the speaker key and the credentials. Among them, the speaker key and certificate are used for data exchange between speakers, which can improve the security of data transmission between combined speakers.
第二方面,本申请提供一种组合音箱的配置方法,该方法用于电子设备配置组合音箱。该电子设备中安装有第一APP。该组合音箱包括多个音箱,每个音箱包括第一天线和第二天线。第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,所述第二天线的发射距离为第二距离。该第一距离小于第二距离。In a second aspect, the present application provides a configuration method of a combined sound box, which is used for configuring a combined sound box for an electronic device. A first APP is installed in the electronic device. The combined sound box includes a plurality of sound boxes, and each sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna. The transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance. The first distance is smaller than the second distance.
其中,电子设备可以显示第一APP的第一界面。该第一界面用于触发电子设备构建N声道的组合音箱,N≥2,N为正整数。响应于用户在第一界面的第一操作,电子设备可以显示第二界面。该第二界面用于指示所述N声道的N个音箱的摆放布局。该N个音箱中每个音箱的角色由N个音箱的摆放布局决定。例如,以N=5为例,5个音箱可以构建包括左前置声道、右前置声道、中置声道、右环绕声道、左环绕声道的环绕声的组合音箱。这5个音箱中不同角色的音箱的摆放位置不同。The electronic device may display the first interface of the first APP. The first interface is used to trigger the electronic device to construct an N-channel combined speaker, where N≥2, and N is a positive integer. In response to the user's first operation on the first interface, the electronic device may display the second interface. The second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels. The role of each speaker in the N speakers is determined by the arrangement of the N speakers. For example, taking N=5 as an example, 5 speakers can construct a combined speaker including the left front channel, the right front channel, the center channel, the right surround channel, and the surround left channel. The placement of speakers for different roles in these five speakers is different.
响应于用户在第二界面的第二操作,电子设备可以广播临近感知网络(neighborhood aware network,NAN)发布消息,并显示第三界面。其中,该NAN发布消息用于指示订阅NAN服务的音箱使用第一天线。该第三界面用于提示用户将电子设备靠近N个音箱中第一角色的音箱,使电子设备与第一角色的音箱之间的距离在 第一距离内。该第三界面还用于指示N个音箱中包括第一角色的音箱在内的一个或多个音箱的角色。这样,用户便可以明确当前正在配置的音箱的角色为第一角色。In response to the user's second operation on the second interface, the electronic device may broadcast a proximity awareness network (NAN) release message, and display the third interface. The NAN release message is used to instruct the speaker subscribed to the NAN service to use the first antenna. The third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the first role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the first role is within the first distance. The third interface is also used to indicate the roles of one or more loudspeakers including the loudspeaker of the first role among the N loudspeakers. In this way, the user can make it clear that the role of the speaker currently being configured is the first role.
其中,用户按照上述第三界面的指示持电子设备靠近上述N个音箱中第一角色的音箱后,该电子设备便可以接收到来自第一音箱的第一消息。该第一消息包括第一音箱的标识和第一秘钥。然后,电子设备可以向第一音箱发送第一加密信息。该第一加密信息是采用第一秘钥加密第一配置信息得到的。该第一配置信息包括第一配网信息和第一指示信息。该第一指示信息用于指示第一音箱被配置为第一角色,第一配网信息用于支持第一音箱与N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。The electronic device can receive the first message from the first speaker after the user holds the electronic device close to the speaker of the first role among the N speakers according to the instructions of the third interface. The first message includes the identification of the first speaker and the first secret key. Then, the electronic device can send the first encrypted information to the first sound box. The first encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the first configuration information with the first secret key. The first configuration information includes first distribution network information and first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the first role, and the first distribution network information is used to support interaction between the first speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
采用本申请的方案,电子设备可以以直观的方式支持用户设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色。这样,便可以解决由于用户难以区分各个音箱而导致角色设置错误的问题,可以提升角色设置的准确率。并且,准确设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色,可以提升组合音箱的音频播放效果。With the solution of the present application, the electronic device can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, it is possible to solve the problem of incorrect character setting due to the difficulty for the user to distinguish each speaker, and to improve the accuracy of character setting. Moreover, accurately setting the roles of each speaker participating in the combination can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speakers.
并且,音箱使用第一天线(即弱天线)进行无线通信的有效传输距离为第一距离(如0.3米)。只有当电子设备与音箱之间的距离小于第一距离,才可以接收到音箱发送的短距消息。而其他与音箱之间距离大于第一距离的设备,则不能接收到音箱发送的短距消息。这样的超短距离通信,可以保证音箱发送的短距消息不被其他设备接收到,可以避免由于其他设备获取到音箱的秘钥与音箱交互从而操作音箱,可以保证电子设备与音箱之间数据传输的安全性。Moreover, the effective transmission distance of the speaker using the first antenna (ie, the weak antenna) for wireless communication is the first distance (eg, 0.3 meters). Only when the distance between the electronic device and the speaker is less than the first distance, the short-range message sent by the speaker can be received. And other devices whose distance from the speaker is greater than the first distance cannot receive short-range messages sent by the speaker. Such ultra-short-range communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's secret key and interact with the speaker, and can ensure data transmission between the electronic device and the speaker. security.
第三方面,本申请提供一种组合音箱的配置方法,该方法用于电子设备配置组合音箱,该电子设备中安装有第一APP。该组合音箱包括多个音箱,每个音箱包括第一天线和第二天线。该第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,第一距离小于第二距离。In a third aspect, the present application provides a method for configuring a combined sound box, the method is used for configuring a combined sound box in an electronic device, and the electronic device is installed with a first APP. The combined sound box includes a plurality of sound boxes, and each sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna. The transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
其中,电子设备可显示第一APP的第一界面;该第一界面用于触发电子设备构建N声道的组合音箱,N≥2,N为正整数。响应于用户在第一界面的第一操作,电子设备可显示第二界面,并广播NAN发布消息。该第二界面用于指示N声道的N个音箱的摆放布局。该N个音箱中每个音箱的角色由N个音箱的摆放布局决定。该NAN发布消息用于指示订阅NAN服务的音箱使用第一天线。响应于用户在第二界面的第二操作,电子设备可显示第三界面。该第三界面用于提示用户将电子设备靠近N个音箱中第一角色的音箱,使电子设备与第一角色的音箱之间的距离在第一距离内。该第三界面还用于指示N个音箱中包括第一角色的音箱在内的一个或多个每个音箱的角色。该电子设备接收来自第一角色的第一音箱的第一消息,第一消息包括第一音箱的标识和第一秘钥。最后,电子设备可向第一音箱发送第一加密信息。该第一加密信息是采用第一秘钥加密第一配置信息得到的。该第一配置信息包括第一配网信息和第一指示信息。该第一指示信息用于指示第一音箱被配置为第一角色,该第一配网信息用于支持第一音箱与N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。Wherein, the electronic device can display the first interface of the first APP; the first interface is used to trigger the electronic device to construct a combined sound box of N channels, N≥2, and N is a positive integer. In response to the user's first operation on the first interface, the electronic device may display the second interface, and broadcast a NAN release message. The second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels. The role of each speaker in the N speakers is determined by the arrangement of the N speakers. The NAN release message is used to instruct the speaker subscribed to the NAN service to use the first antenna. In response to the user's second operation on the second interface, the electronic device may display the third interface. The third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the first role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the first role is within the first distance. The third interface is also used to indicate one or more roles of each speaker among the N speakers including the speaker of the first role. The electronic device receives a first message from the first speaker of the first character, where the first message includes an identifier of the first speaker and a first secret key. Finally, the electronic device can send the first encrypted information to the first sound box. The first encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the first configuration information with the first secret key. The first configuration information includes first distribution network information and first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the first role, and the first distribution information is used to support the interaction between the first speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
与上述第一方面和第二方面的方法不同的是,在第三方面的方法中,电子设备响应于用户在第一界面的第一操作,便可以广播NAN发布消息;而不是响应于用户在第二界面的第二操作,才广播NAN发布消息。其中,第三方面提供的方法的其他特征与第一方面提供的方法中相同,本申请这里不予赘述。Different from the methods of the first and second aspects above, in the method of the third aspect, the electronic device can broadcast the NAN release message in response to the user's first operation on the first interface; The second operation on the second interface is to broadcast the NAN release message. Wherein, other features of the method provided by the third aspect are the same as those of the method provided by the first aspect, which will not be repeated in this application.
在第二方面或第三方面的一种可能的设计方式中,上述第二界面还可以用于指示N个音箱中每个音箱的角色。也就是说,电子设备在第二界面不仅可以向用户指示N声道的N个音箱的摆放布局,还可以向用户指示N个音箱中每个音箱的角色。In a possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, the above-mentioned second interface may also be used to indicate the role of each speaker in the N speakers. That is to say, on the second interface, the electronic device can not only indicate to the user the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels, but also indicate to the user the role of each of the N speakers.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在电子设备向第一音箱发送第一加密信息之后,电子设备可以显示第四界面。该第四界面用于提示用户将电子设备靠近N个音箱中第二角色的音箱,使电子设备与第二角色的音箱之间的距离在第一距离内。其中,第四界面还用于指示N个音箱中包括第二角色的音箱在内的一个或多个音箱的角色。这样,用户便可以明确当前正在配置的音箱的角色为第二角色。In another possible design of the second aspect or the third aspect, after the electronic device sends the first encrypted information to the first sound box, the electronic device may display a fourth interface. The fourth interface is used for prompting the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the second role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the second role is within the first distance. Wherein, the fourth interface is further used to indicate the roles of one or more speakers including the speakers of the second role among the N speakers. In this way, the user can make it clear that the role of the speaker currently being configured is the second role.
用户按照上述第四界面的指示持电子设备靠近上述N个音箱中第一角色的音箱后,该电子设备便可以接收到来自第二音箱的第二消息。该第二消息包括第二音箱的标识和第二秘钥。然后,电子设备可以向第二音箱发送第二加密信息。该第二加密信息是采用第二秘钥加密第二配置信息得到的。该第二配置信息包括第二配网信息和第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示第二音箱被配置为第二角色,第二配网信息用于支持第二音箱与N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。After the user holds the electronic device close to the speaker of the first role among the N speakers according to the instructions of the fourth interface, the electronic device can receive the second message from the second speaker. The second message includes the identification of the second speaker and the second secret key. Then, the electronic device can send the second encrypted information to the second sound box. The second encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the second configuration information with the second secret key. The second configuration information includes second network distribution information and second indication information. The second indication information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as the second role, and the second distribution network information is used to support the interaction between the second speaker and other speakers in the N speakers.
其中,电子设备向第一音箱发送第一加密信息之后,便完成了第一角色的音箱的配置工作。此时,电子设备可以显示第四界面,提示用户持电子设备靠近第二角色的音箱,以配置该第二角色的音箱。采用本申请的方案,电子设备可以以直观的方式支持用户设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色。这样,可以提升角色设置的准确率。并且,采用超短距离通信,可以保证电子设备与音箱之间数据传输的安全性。The configuration of the speaker of the first role is completed after the electronic device sends the first encrypted information to the first speaker. At this time, the electronic device may display a fourth interface, prompting the user to hold the electronic device close to the speaker of the second character to configure the speaker of the second character. With the solution of the present application, the electronic device can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, the accuracy of character setting can be improved. Moreover, the use of ultra-short-distance communication can ensure the security of data transmission between electronic devices and speakers.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,电子设备可以在确定一个角色(如第一角色)的音箱配置完成后,再配置下一个角色(如第二角色)的音箱。具体的,上述电子设备显示第四界面可以包括:电子设备接收到来自第一音箱的第一确认消息后,显示第四界面。其中,该第一确认消息用于指示第一音箱配置成功。In another possible design of the second aspect or the third aspect, the electronic device may configure the speakers of the next role (eg the second role) after determining that the speaker configuration of one role (eg, the first role) is completed. . Specifically, the above-mentioned electronic device displaying the fourth interface may include: after the electronic device receives the first confirmation message from the first speaker, displaying the fourth interface. Wherein, the first confirmation message is used to indicate that the configuration of the first speaker is successful.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述N个音箱可以以主音箱作为接入点(access point,AP)的AP模式构成组合音箱。也就是说,N个音箱中的主音箱可以作为AP提供无线局域网(如第一无线局域网),N个音箱中的从音箱可以接入该主音箱提供的第一无线局域网。该N个音箱可以通过该第一无线局域网交互。In another possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, the above N speakers may form a combined speaker in an AP mode in which the main speaker is used as an access point (access point, AP). That is to say, the master speaker in the N speakers can serve as an AP to provide a wireless local area network (eg, the first wireless local area network), and the slave speakers in the N speakers can access the first wireless local area network provided by the master speaker. The N speakers can interact through the first wireless local area network.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第二配置信息还可以包括第一身份信息。该第一身份信息用于指示所述第二音箱被配置为从音箱,还用于指示第二音箱接入主音箱作为AP提供第一无线局域网。上述第二配网信息可以包括:第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码。这样,从音箱(如第二音箱)便可以根据第一SSID和第一接入密码接入主音箱提供第一无线局域网,便可以与主音箱交互。In another possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, in the scenario of constructing the combined speaker in the AP mode, the above-mentioned second configuration information may further include the first identity information. The first identity information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and is also used to instruct the second speaker to access the master speaker as an AP to provide the first wireless local area network. The foregoing second network configuration information may include: a first SSID and a first access password of the first wireless local area network. In this way, the slave speaker (eg, the second speaker) can access the master speaker to provide the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password, and can interact with the master speaker.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息。该第而身份信息用于指示所述第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示所述第一音箱作为AP提供第一无线局域网。上述所述第一配网信息包括:所述第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码。这样,主音箱(如第一音箱)便可以提供第一无线局域网,并由从音箱根据该第一SSID和第一接入密码接入该第一无线局域网。In another possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, in the scenario of constructing a combined speaker in an AP mode, the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information. The second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as a main speaker, and is also used to instruct the first speaker to provide a first wireless local area network as an AP. The above-mentioned first network distribution information includes: the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network. In this way, the master speaker (eg, the first speaker) can provide the first wireless local area network, and the slave speaker can access the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password.
在这种设计方式中,主音箱提供的第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码,可以是由电子设备指定的。In this design manner, the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network provided by the main speaker may be specified by the electronic device.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,主音箱提供的第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码,可以是电子设备从主音箱获取到的。具体的,上述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息。该第二身份信息用于指示第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示第一音箱作为AP提供第一无线局域网。上述方法还包括:电子设备从第一音箱获取第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码。In another possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, in the scenario where the combined speaker is constructed in the AP mode, the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network provided by the main speaker may be The electronics are taken from the main speakers. Specifically, the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information. The second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the main speaker, and is also used to instruct the first speaker to provide the first wireless local area network as an AP. The above method further includes: the electronic device obtains the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network from the first sound box.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第一身份信息还用于指示第一音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网。In another possible design of the second aspect or the third aspect, in the scenario of constructing the combined speaker in AP mode, the above-mentioned first identity information is also used to instruct the first speaker to access the second wireless local area network provided by the router .
其中,电子设备可以通过上述第一配网信息,向主音箱(如第一音箱)指示第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。具体的,第一配网信息还包括:第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。The electronic device may indicate the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network to the main speaker (eg, the first speaker) through the above-mentioned first network distribution information. Specifically, the first network distribution information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
或者,电子设备可以采用上述第一秘钥加密该第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码得到的,得到第三加密信息。然后,向第一音箱发送该第三加密信息。Alternatively, the electronic device may obtain the third encrypted information by encrypting the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network by using the above-mentioned first secret key. Then, the third encrypted information is sent to the first speaker.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述N个音箱可以以非AP模式构成组合音箱。具体的,N个音箱(包括主音箱和从音箱)可以接入路由器提供无线局域网(如第二无线局域网)。该N个音箱可以通过该第二无线局域网交互。In another possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, the above-mentioned N sound boxes may form a combined sound box in a non-AP mode. Specifically, N speakers (including master speakers and slave speakers) can be connected to a router to provide a wireless local area network (eg, a second wireless local area network). The N speakers can interact through the second wireless local area network.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以非AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第二配置信息还包括第一身份信息。该第一身份信息用于指示第二音箱被配置为从音箱,还用于指示第二音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网。上述第二配网信息包括:第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。这样,从音箱(如第二音箱)便可以根据第二SSID和第二接入密码接入路由器提供第二无线局域网,便可以与主音箱交互。In another possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, in a scenario where the combined speaker is constructed in a non-AP mode, the above-mentioned second configuration information further includes the first identity information. The first identity information is used to indicate that the second sound box is configured as a slave sound box, and is also used to indicate that the second sound box is connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router. The above-mentioned second network distribution information includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network. In this way, the slave speaker (such as the second speaker) can access the router to provide the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and can interact with the master speaker.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以非AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,上述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息。该第二身份信息用于指示第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示第一音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网。上述第一配网信息还包括:第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。这样,主音箱(如第一音箱)便可以根据第二SSID和第二接入密码接入路由器提供第二无线局域网,便可以与从音箱交互。In another possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, in a scenario where the combined speaker is constructed in a non-AP mode, the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes second identity information. The second identity information is used to indicate that the first sound box is configured as the main sound box, and is also used to indicate that the first sound box is connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router. The above-mentioned first network distribution information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network. In this way, the master speaker (such as the first speaker) can access the router to provide the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and can then interact with the slave speaker.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,在以AP模式或非AP模式构建组合音箱的场景下,电子设备还可以向主音箱指示各个从音箱的标识和角色。具体的,上述方法还可以包括:电子设备向所述第一音箱发送所述第二音箱的标识和所述第二指示信息。这样,主音箱便可以按照各个从音箱的标识和角色与从音箱交互,有利于保证各个音箱按照正确的角色播放音箱,可以提升组合音箱的音频播放效果。In another possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, in the scenario of constructing a combined speaker in AP mode or non-AP mode, the electronic device may also indicate the identity and role of each slave speaker to the master speaker. Specifically, the above method may further include: the electronic device sending the identification of the second sound box and the second indication information to the first sound box. In this way, the master speaker can interact with the slave speakers according to the identification and role of each slave speaker, which is beneficial to ensure that each speaker plays the speaker according to the correct role, and can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speaker.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第二配置信息还包括用于N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证。其中,音箱之间采用音箱秘钥和凭证进行数据交互,可以提升组合音箱之间进行数据传输的安全性。In another possible design of the second aspect or the third aspect, the above-mentioned second configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate used for interaction of the N speakers. Among them, the speaker key and certificate are used for data exchange between speakers, which can improve the security of data transmission between combined speakers.
在第二方面或第三方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第一配置信息还包括用 于N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证。其中,音箱之间采用音箱秘钥和凭证进行数据交互,可以提升组合音箱之间进行数据传输的安全性。In another possible design manner of the second aspect or the third aspect, the above-mentioned first configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate used for the interaction of the N speakers. Among them, the speaker key and certificate are used for data exchange between speakers, which can improve the security of data transmission between combined speakers.
第四方面,本申请提供一种组合音箱的配置方法,应用于音箱,该音箱包括第一天线和第二天线,第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,第一距离小于第二距离。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a configuration method of a combined sound box, which is applied to a sound box, the sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna, the transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance. distance, the first distance is less than the second distance.
该方法可以包括:音箱接收电子设备广播的临近感知网络NAN发布消息,NAN发布消息用于指示音箱使用第一天线;响应于NAN发布消息,音箱使用第一天线广播消息;其中,消息中包括音箱的标识和秘钥;音箱接收来自电子设备的加密信息,并采用秘钥解密加密信息得到配置信息;其中,加密信息是电子设备接收到消息后发送的,加密信息是采用秘钥加密配置信息得到的,配置信息包括角色指示信息和配网信息,角色指示信息用于指示音箱被配置的角色,配网信息用于支持音箱与组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。其中,音箱广播的消息可以是上述第一方面或第二方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中所述的第一消息或第二消息。该消息是使用第一天线(即超短距天线或弱天线)广播的,因此可以称为短距消息。The method may include: the sound box receives a proximity awareness network NAN broadcast message broadcast by the electronic device, and the NAN release message is used to instruct the sound box to use the first antenna; in response to the NAN releasing the message, the sound box uses the first antenna to broadcast the message; wherein, the message includes the sound box The sound box receives the encrypted information from the electronic equipment, and uses the secret key to decrypt the encrypted information to obtain configuration information; wherein, the encrypted information is sent by the electronic equipment after receiving the message, and the encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the configuration information with the secret key. Yes, the configuration information includes role indication information and distribution network information, the role indication information is used to indicate the role the speaker is configured with, and the distribution network information is used to support the interaction between the speaker and other speakers in the combination speaker. Wherein, the message broadcast by the speaker may be the first message or the second message described in the first aspect or the second aspect and any possible design manners thereof. The message is broadcast using the first antenna (ie, the ultra-short-range antenna or weak antenna) and can therefore be called a short-range message.
在第四方面的一种可能的设计方式中,上述方法还可以包括:音箱订阅NAN服务;其中,订阅NAN服务的设备能够接收并响应NAN发布消息。In a possible design of the fourth aspect, the above method may further include: the speaker subscribes to the NAN service; wherein, the device subscribed to the NAN service can receive and respond to the NAN publishing message.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述方法还可以包括:音箱发出提示信息,提示信息用于指示音箱被配置的角色。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the above method may further include: the speaker sends out prompt information, and the prompt information is used to indicate the role that the speaker is configured with.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述音箱使用第一天线广播消息,包括:音箱周期性切换使用第一天线和第二天线;音箱使用第一天线时,广播消息。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the above-mentioned sound box uses the first antenna to broadcast the message, including: the sound box periodically switches to use the first antenna and the second antenna; when the sound box uses the first antenna, broadcast the message.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述配置信息还包括:用于指示音箱被配置为从音箱的身份信息,身份信息还用于指示音箱接入第一无线局域网;配网信息还包括:第一无线局域网的第一服务集标识SSID和第一接入密码。上述方法还包括:音箱根据第一SSID和第一接入密码,接入第一无线局域网,并通过第一无线局域网与N个音箱中的主音箱交互。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the above configuration information further includes: identity information used to indicate that the speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and the identity information is also used to instruct the speaker to access the first wireless local area network; network distribution information It also includes: a first service set identifier SSID and a first access password of the first wireless local area network. The above method further includes: the sound box is connected to the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password, and interacts with the main sound box in the N sound boxes through the first wireless local area network.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述配置信息还包括:用于指示音箱被配置为主音箱的身份信息,身份信息还用于指示音箱作为接入点AP提供第一无线局域网;配网信息还包括:第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码。上述方法还包括:音箱作为AP提供第一无线局域网,并由组合音箱中的其他音箱接入第一无线局域网;音箱通过第一无线局域网与组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。In another possible design of the fourth aspect, the above configuration information further includes: identity information used to indicate that the speaker is configured as the main speaker, and the identity information is also used to instruct the speaker to serve as an access point AP to provide the first wireless local area network ; The network distribution information further includes: the first SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network. The above method further includes: the speaker acts as an AP to provide a first wireless local area network, and other speakers in the combined speaker are connected to the first wireless local area network; the speaker interacts with other speakers in the combined speaker through the first wireless local area network.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述配置信息还包括:用于指示音箱被配置为主音箱的身份信息或者音箱被配置为从音箱的身份信息,身份信息还用于指示音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网;配网信息还包括:第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。上述方法还包括:音箱根据第二SSID和第二接入密码,接入第二无线局域网,并通过第二无线局域网与组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the above configuration information further includes: identity information used to indicate that the speaker is configured as a master speaker or identity information that the speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and the identity information is also used to indicate that the speaker is configured Access the second wireless local area network provided by the router; the network configuration information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network. The above method further includes: the speaker is connected to the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and interacts with other speakers in the combined speaker through the second wireless local area network.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述配置信息还包括用于N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证。上述方法还包括:音箱根据音箱秘钥和凭证与组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the above configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate for the interaction of the N speakers. The above method further includes: the speaker interacts with other speakers in the combined speaker according to the speaker key and the certificate.
在第四方面的另一种可能的设计方式中,上述方法还包括:音箱接收到加密信息 后,向电子设备发送确认消息;或者,音箱发出提示信息后,响应于用户对提示信息的第三操作,向电子设备发送确认消息;其中,提示信息用于指示音箱被配置的角色。其中,确认消息用于指示音箱配置成功。In another possible design manner of the fourth aspect, the above method further includes: after the speaker receives the encrypted information, sending a confirmation message to the electronic device; operation, sending a confirmation message to the electronic device; wherein, the prompt information is used to indicate the role that the speaker is configured with. Among them, the confirmation message is used to indicate that the speaker configuration is successful.
第五方面,本申请提供一种电子设备,该电子设备中安装有第一APP。该电子设备包括:存储器、显示屏、通信模块和一个或多个处理器。该存储器、显示屏、通信模块与处理器耦合。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides an electronic device in which a first APP is installed. The electronic device includes: a memory, a display screen, a communication module and one or more processors. The memory, display screen, and communication module are coupled to the processor.
该显示屏用于显示处理器生成的图像或界面。该通信模块用于与其他设备通信。该存储器用于存储电子设备中的数据。该存储器还用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当计算机指令被处理器执行时,使得电子设备执行如第一方面、第二方面或第三方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中,电子设备所执行的方法。The display is used to display images or interfaces generated by the processor. This communication module is used to communicate with other devices. The memory is used to store data in the electronic device. The memory is also used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device is made to perform the method performed by the electronic device in the first aspect, the second aspect or the third aspect and any possible design manners thereof.
第六方面,本申请提供一种音箱。该音箱可以是上述第一方面或第二方面所述的第一音箱或第二音箱。该音箱包括第一天线和第二天线,所述第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,所述第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,所述第一距离小于所述第二距离。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a sound box. The sound box may be the first sound box or the second sound box described in the first aspect or the second aspect. The sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna, the transmission distance of the first antenna is a first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is a second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
该音箱包括存储器、扬声器、通信模块和一个或多个处理器。通信模块包括第一天线和第二天线,所述第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,所述第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,所述第一距离小于所述第二距离。所述存储器、所述扬声器、所述通信模块与所述处理器耦合;所述扬声器用于播放音频数据,所述通信模块用于与其他设备通信,所述存储器用于存储所述音箱中的数据。所述存储器还用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述音箱执行如第一方面或第四方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中音箱所执行的方法。The enclosure includes memory, speakers, a communication module, and one or more processors. The communication module includes a first antenna and a second antenna, the transmission distance of the first antenna is a first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is a second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance. The memory, the speaker, and the communication module are coupled to the processor; the speaker is used to play audio data, the communication module is used to communicate with other devices, and the memory is used to store data in the sound box. data. The memory is also used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions. When executed by the processor, the computer instructions cause the sound box to perform the method performed by the sound box in the first aspect or the fourth aspect and any possible design manners thereof.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供一种芯片系统,该芯片系统应用于包括显示屏、通信模块和存储器的电子设备。该芯片系统包括一个或多个接口电路和一个或多个处理器。该接口电路和处理器通过线路互联。该接口电路用于从电子设备的存储器接收信号,并向处理器发送该信号,该信号包括存储器中存储的计算机指令。当处理器执行所述计算机指令时,电子设备执行如第一方面、第二方面或第三方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中电子设备所执行的方法。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system is applied to an electronic device including a display screen, a communication module, and a memory. The chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors. The interface circuit and the processor are interconnected by wires. The interface circuit is configured to receive signals from the memory of the electronic device and send the signals to the processor, the signals including computer instructions stored in the memory. When the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device executes the method performed by the electronic device in the first aspect, the second aspect or the third aspect and any possible design manners thereof.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供一种芯片系统,该芯片系统应用于包括通信模块和存储器的音箱。该通信模块包括第一天线和第二天线,第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,第一距离小于第二距离。该芯片系统包括一个或多个接口电路和一个或多个处理器。该接口电路和处理器通过线路互联。该接口电路用于从音箱的存储器接收信号,并向处理器发送该信号,该信号包括存储器中存储的计算机指令。当处理器执行所述计算机指令时,音箱执行如第一方面或第四方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, and the chip system is applied to a sound box including a communication module and a memory. The communication module includes a first antenna and a second antenna, the transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance. The chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors. The interface circuit and the processor are interconnected by wires. The interface circuit is used to receive a signal from the memory of the speaker and send the signal to the processor, the signal comprising computer instructions stored in the memory. When the processor executes the computer instructions, the sound box executes the method described in the first aspect or the fourth aspect and any possible design manners thereof.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在设备上运行时,使得所述设备执行如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面或第四方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。该设备可以是上述电子设备或者音箱。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions are executed on a device, the device causes the device to perform the operations of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect. The method described in the aspect or the fourth aspect and any possible design manner thereof. The device may be the aforementioned electronic device or a speaker.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计 算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面或第四方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。该计算机可以是电子设备或音箱。In a tenth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, or the fourth aspect and the same. any of the possible design methods described. The computer can be an electronic device or a speaker.
可以理解地,上述提供的第五方面所述的电子设备,第六方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的音箱,第七方面和第八方面所述的芯片系统,第九方面所述的计算机存储介质,第十方面所述的计算机程序产品所能达到的有益效果,可参考如第一方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Understandably, the electronic device described in the fifth aspect provided above, the sound box described in the sixth aspect and any possible design manner thereof, the chip system described in the seventh aspect and the eighth aspect, and the ninth aspect. With regard to the computer storage medium described above, the beneficial effects that can be achieved by the computer program product described in the tenth aspect may refer to the beneficial effects in the first aspect and any possible design methods thereof, which will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种组合音箱的配置方法所应用的通信系统示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system to which a configuration method of a combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the present application is applied;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的硬件结构示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种音箱的硬件结构示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a sound box provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4A为本申请实施例提供的一种手机中的天线的结构示意图;4A is a schematic structural diagram of an antenna in a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the application;
图4B为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机中的天线的结构示意图;4B is a schematic structural diagram of an antenna in another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the application;
图4C为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机中的天线的结构示意图;4C is a schematic structural diagram of an antenna in another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4D为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机中的天线的结构示意图;4D is a schematic structural diagram of an antenna in another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4E为本申请实施例提供的另一种天线的发射距离的示意图;4E is a schematic diagram of a transmission distance of another antenna provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种组合音箱的配置方法流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a configuration method of a combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的显示界面示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7A为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机的显示界面示意图;7A is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7B为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机的显示界面示意图;7B is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7C为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机的显示界面示意图;7C is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种环绕声组合音箱中各个音箱的摆放布局示意图;8 is a schematic diagram of the placement layout of each speaker in a surround sound combination speaker provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9A为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机的显示界面示意图;9A is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9B为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机的显示界面示意图;9B is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10A为本申请实施例提供的一种音箱的显示界面示意图;10A is a schematic diagram of a display interface of a sound box provided by an embodiment of the application;
图10B为本申请实施例提供的另一种音箱的显示界面示意图;10B is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another sound box provided by an embodiment of the application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种音箱切换强天线和弱天线的方法流程图;11 is a flowchart of a method for switching a strong antenna and a weak antenna for a speaker box provided by an embodiment of the application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机的显示界面示意图;12 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的另一种音箱的显示界面示意图;13 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another sound box provided by an embodiment of the application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的另一种组合音箱的配置方法流程图;14 is a flowchart of another configuration method of a combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种组合音箱的系统示意图;15 is a schematic diagram of a system of a combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的另一种组合音箱的系统示意图;16 is a system schematic diagram of another combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机的显示界面示意图;17 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的另一种组合音箱的配置方法流程图;18 is a flowchart of another configuration method of a combined sound box provided by an embodiment of the application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的另一种手机的显示界面示意图;19 is a schematic diagram of a display interface of another mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备和音箱的结构组成示意图;20 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device and a sound box provided by an embodiment of the application;
图21为本申请实施例提供的一种芯片系统的结构组成示意图。FIG. 21 is a schematic structural composition diagram of a chip system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的 特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are only used for descriptive purposes, and should not be construed as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of indicated technical features. Thus, a feature defined as "first", "second" may expressly or implicitly include one or more of that feature. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more.
本申请实施例提供一种组合音箱的配置方法,该方法用于电子设备与参与组合的多个音箱交互,以构建组合音箱。An embodiment of the present application provides a method for configuring a combined sound box, and the method is used for an electronic device to interact with a plurality of sound boxes participating in the combination to construct a combined sound box.
请参考图1,其示出本申请实施例提供的一种组合音箱的配置方法所应用的通信系统示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统可以包括电子设备100(如手机)和参与组合的多个音箱(如音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205)。Please refer to FIG. 1 , which shows a schematic diagram of a communication system to which a method for configuring a sound box combination provided by an embodiment of the present application is applied. As shown in FIG. 1 , the communication system may include an electronic device 100 (eg, a mobile phone) and multiple speakers (eg, a speaker 201 , a speaker 202 , a speaker 203 , a speaker 204 , and a speaker 205 ) participating in the combination.
其中,电子设备100中可以安装用于管理音箱的第一APP(也称为管理APP或者音箱APP)。电子设备100可以通过上述第一APP以直观的方式支持用户设置各个音箱的角色,向各个音箱传输配网信息,将上述多个音箱构建成组合音箱。Wherein, a first APP (also referred to as a management APP or a speaker APP) for managing speakers may be installed in the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 can support the user to set the role of each speaker in an intuitive manner through the above-mentioned first APP, transmit network distribution information to each speaker, and construct the above-mentioned multiple speakers into a combined speaker.
本申请实施例的方法中,电子设备可以以直观的方式支持用户设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色。这样,便可以解决由于用户难以区分各个音箱而导致角色设置错误的问题,可以提升角色设置的准确率。并且,准确设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色,可以提升组合音箱的音频播放效果。In the method of the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, it is possible to solve the problem of incorrect character setting due to the difficulty for the user to distinguish each speaker, and to improve the accuracy of character setting. Moreover, accurately setting the roles of each speaker participating in the combination can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speakers.
其中,构建成组合音箱的多个音箱可播放多声道的音频数据,以形成立体或环绕声场,产生混响效果,可以给用户带来身临其境的感觉。其中,组合音箱中的每个音箱可用于播放一个声道的音频数据。Among them, a plurality of speakers constructed as a combined speaker can play multi-channel audio data to form a stereo or surround sound field and generate a reverberation effect, which can bring users an immersive feeling. Among them, each speaker in the combined speaker can be used to play audio data of one channel.
在第一种使用场景下,上述多个音箱可以组成立体声的组合音箱。在这种使用场景下,该多个音箱可以是两个音箱。这两个音箱中的一个音箱的角色为左声道,用于播放左声道的音频数据;另一个音箱的角色为右声道,用于播放右声道的音频数据。In the first usage scenario, the above-mentioned multiple speakers can form a stereo combined speaker. In this usage scenario, the plurality of speakers may be two speakers. One of the two speakers plays the role of the left channel and is used to play the audio data of the left channel; the other speaker plays the role of the right channel and is used to play the audio data of the right channel.
在第二种使用场景下,上述多个音箱可以组成环绕声的组合音箱。在这种使用场景下,该多个音箱可以是五个音箱,如图1所示的五个音箱。这五个音箱中的一个音箱(如音箱201)的角色为左前置声道,用于播放左前置声道的音频数据;另一个音箱(如音箱202)的角色为右前置声道,用于播放右前置声道的音频数据;另一个音箱(如音箱203)的角色为中置声道,用于播放中置声道的音频数据;另一个音箱(如音箱204)的角色为左环绕声道,用于播放左环绕声道的音频数据;另一个音箱(如音箱205)的角色为右环绕声道,用于播放右环绕声道的音频数据。In the second usage scenario, the above-mentioned multiple speakers can form a combined speaker for surround sound. In this usage scenario, the plurality of sound boxes may be five sound boxes, such as the five sound boxes shown in FIG. 1 . One of the five speakers (such as the speaker 201) plays the role of the front left channel, and is used to play the audio data of the front left channel; the other speaker (such as the speaker 202) plays the role of the front right channel , used to play the audio data of the right front channel; the role of another speaker (such as the speaker 203) is the center channel, used to play the audio data of the center channel; the role of another speaker (such as the speaker 204) is the left surround channel, and is used to play the audio data of the left surround channel; the role of another speaker (such as the speaker 205) is the right surround channel, and is used to play the audio data of the right surround channel.
当然,本申请实施例中组合音箱中音箱的数量包括但不限于上述两种使用场景中所述的数量。使用不同数量的音箱所构建成的组合音箱来播放音频数据,可以产生不同的混响效果。本申请实施例中,对组合音箱中音箱的数量不作限制。以下实施例中,以图1所示的五个音箱参与组合,用于构建组合音箱为例,介绍本申请实施例的方法。Of course, the number of sound boxes in the combined sound box in the embodiment of the present application includes, but is not limited to, the numbers described in the above two usage scenarios. Using a combination of speakers built with different numbers of speakers to play audio data can produce different reverberation effects. In the embodiment of the present application, the number of sound boxes in the combined sound box is not limited. In the following embodiments, the method of the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the five sound boxes shown in FIG. 1 participating in the combination and being used to construct the combined sound box as an example.
示例性的,本申请实施例中的电子设备可以是手机、平板电脑、膝上型、可穿戴设备(如智能手表)、手持计算机、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本,以及蜂窝电话、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)\虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备等包括显示屏和短距离通信模块的设备,本申请实施例对该电子设备的具体形态不作特殊限制。上述音箱可以是智能音箱。Exemplarily, the electronic device in this embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a laptop, a wearable device (such as a smart watch), a handheld computer, a notebook computer, and an ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC). ), netbooks, and devices including display screens and short-range communication modules, such as cellular phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), augmented reality (AR)\virtual reality (VR) devices, etc. The specific form of the electronic device is not particularly limited in the application embodiments. The above-mentioned speaker may be a smart speaker.
本申请实施例中以图1所示的电子设备100是手机为例,对本申请实施例提供的电子设备的结构进行举例说明。如图2所示,电子设备100可以包括:处理器110, 外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。In the embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example as a mobile phone to illustrate the structure of the electronic device provided by the embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2, the electronic device 100 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, Antenna 1, Antenna 2, Mobile Communication Module 150, Wireless Communication Module 160, Audio Module 170, Speaker 170A, Receiver 170B, Microphone 170C, Headphone Jack 170D, Sensor Module 180, Key 190, Motor 191, Indicator 192, Camera 193, a display screen 194, and a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like.
其中,上述传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L和骨传导传感器180M等传感器。The above sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, Sensors such as ambient light sensor 180L and bone conduction sensor 180M.
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or some components may be combined, or some components may be split, or a different arrangement of components. The illustrated components may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 . The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the latency of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby increasing the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. The interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transceiver (universal asynchronous transmitter) receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that, the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in this embodiment is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140 可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger. The charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 .
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 . The power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 and supplies power to the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 . The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance). In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 . In other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 may be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modulation and demodulation processor, the baseband processor, and the like.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。 Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example, the antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of the wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。The mobile communication module 150 may provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G etc. applied on the electronic device 100 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA) and the like.
电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 and the mobile communication module 150 are coupled. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and then turn it into an electromagnetic wave for radiation through the antenna 1 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 110 .
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。例如,上述WLAN可以为(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络。The wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (WLAN), bluetooth (BT), global navigation satellite system (GNSS), frequency modulation (FM) applied on the electronic device 100 ), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. For example, the above-mentioned WLAN may be a (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) network.
电子设备100的天线2和无线通信模块160耦合。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The antenna 2 of the electronic device 100 and the wireless communication module 160 are coupled. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , perform frequency modulation on it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 2 .
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。显示屏194可以是触摸屏,该显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。该显示屏194包括显示面板。The electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information. The display screen 194 may be a touch screen, and the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like. The display screen 194 includes a display panel.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及 应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。The electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193, the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor. The ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193 . In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193 . Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100 . The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example to save files like music, video etc in external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。例如,在本申请实施例中,处理器110可以通过执行存储在内部存储器121中的指令,内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions. The processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 121 . For example, in this embodiment of the present application, the processor 110 may execute instructions stored in the internal memory 121, and the internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a storage data area.
其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。The storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like. The storage data area may store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100 and the like. In addition, the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 may implement audio functions through an audio module 170, a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, a microphone 170C, an earphone interface 170D, an application processor, and the like. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The audio module 170 is used for converting digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and also for converting analog audio input into digital audio signal. The earphone jack 170D is used to connect wired earphones. The earphone interface 170D can be the USB interface 130, or can be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。The keys 190 include a power-on key, a volume key, and the like. Keys 190 may be mechanical keys. It can also be a touch key. Motor 191 can generate vibrating cues. The motor 191 can be used for vibrating alerts for incoming calls, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging state, the change of the power, and can also be used to indicate a message, a missed call, a notification, and the like. The SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card. The SIM card can be contacted and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling out from the SIM card interface 195 . The electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. The SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card and so on.
请参考图3,为本申请实施例提供的一种音箱300的结构示意图。如图3所示,音箱300可以包括:处理器301,外部存储器接口302,内部存储器303,USB接口305,电源管理模块304,天线a,无线通信模块308,显示屏306,音频模块307,以及扬声器307A等。Please refer to FIG. 3 , which is a schematic structural diagram of a sound box 300 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3, the speaker 300 may include: a processor 301, an external memory interface 302, an internal memory 303, a USB interface 305, a power management module 304, an antenna a, a wireless communication module 308, a display screen 306, an audio module 307, and Speaker 307A, etc.
处理器301可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器301可以包括AP,调制解调处理器,GPU,ISP,控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,DSP,基带处理器,和/或NPU等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中处理器301中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。The processor 301 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 301 may include an AP, modem processor, GPU, ISP, controller, memory, video codec, DSP, baseband processor, and/or NPU, etc. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated into one or more processors, and a memory may also be provided in the processor 301 for storing instructions and data.
电源管理模块304用于连接电源。电源管理模块304还可以与处理器301、内部存储器303、显示屏306和无线通信模块308等连接。电源管理模块304通过USB接 口305接收电源的输入,为处理器301、内部存储器303、显示屏306和无线通信模块308等供电。在一些实施例中,电源管理模块304也可以设置于处理器301中。The power management module 304 is used to connect power. The power management module 304 can also be connected with the processor 301, the internal memory 303, the display screen 306, the wireless communication module 308, and the like. The power management module 304 receives power input through the USB interface 305, and supplies power to the processor 301, the internal memory 303, the display screen 306, the wireless communication module 308, and the like. In some embodiments, the power management module 304 may also be provided in the processor 301 .
音箱300的无线通信功能可以通过天线和无线通信模块308等实现。其中,无线通信模块308可以提供应用在音箱300上的包括WLAN(如Wi-Fi网络),蓝牙(BT),GNSS,等无线通信的解决方案。The wireless communication function of the speaker 300 can be realized by the antenna and the wireless communication module 308 and the like. Among them, the wireless communication module 308 can provide a wireless communication solution including WLAN (such as Wi-Fi network), Bluetooth (BT), GNSS, etc. applied on the speaker 300 .
无线通信模块308可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块308经由天线a接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器301。无线通信模块308还可以从处理器301接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 308 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 308 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna a, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 301 . The wireless communication module 308 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 301, frequency-modulate the signal, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna.
在一些实施例中,音箱300的天线a和无线通信模块308耦合,使得音箱300可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。例如,本申请实施例中的无线通信模块308可以是蓝牙模块或者Wi-Fi模块。该无线通信模块308用于与电子设备100以及其他音箱进行数据传输。In some embodiments, the antenna a of the sound box 300 is coupled with the wireless communication module 308, so that the sound box 300 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. For example, the wireless communication module 308 in this embodiment of the present application may be a Bluetooth module or a Wi-Fi module. The wireless communication module 308 is used for data transmission with the electronic device 100 and other speakers.
其中,上述天线a可以包括一个或多个天线。该一个或多个天线可以分为第一天线(弱天线)和第二天线(正常天线,也称为强天线)。其中,第一天线发射无线信号的发射距离(如第一距离)小于第二天线发射无线信号的发射距离(如第二距离)。该第二天线和第一天线可进行切换。该第二天线和第一天线通过音箱300上的无线通信模块实现与其他设备(如手机)的网络通信。图4A示出了本申请实施例提供的音箱300中的天线结构的一示意图。Wherein, the above-mentioned antenna a may include one or more antennas. The one or more antennas can be divided into a first antenna (weak antenna) and a second antenna (normal antenna, also called strong antenna). Wherein, the transmission distance (eg, the first distance) over which the first antenna transmits the wireless signal is smaller than the transmission distance (eg, the second distance) over which the second antenna transmits the wireless signal. The second antenna and the first antenna are switchable. The second antenna and the first antenna implement network communication with other devices (such as mobile phones) through the wireless communication module on the sound box 300 . FIG. 4A shows a schematic diagram of an antenna structure in a sound box 300 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
在一种示例中,上述第二天线和第一天线可以是不同的两个天线。图3所示的音箱300可以是图4A所示的电子设备40(如音箱)。电子设备40可以包括微控制单元(microcontroller unit,MCU)404,无线通信模块403,天线401和天线402。In one example, the above-mentioned second antenna and first antenna may be two different antennas. The sound box 300 shown in FIG. 3 may be the electronic device 40 (eg, a sound box) shown in FIG. 4A . The electronic device 40 may include a microcontroller unit (MCU) 404 , a wireless communication module 403 , an antenna 401 and an antenna 402 .
其中,图4A所示的天线401是上述第二天线,天线402是第一天线。图3所示的天线a可以包括图4A所示的天线401和天线402。图3所示的无线通信模块308可以是图4A所示的无线通信模块403;图4A所示MCU 404可由图3中处理器301实现。其中,上述无线通信模块403可以是Wi-Fi芯片,该无线通信模块403的射频输入输出(radio frequency input/output,RFIO)引脚通过单刀双掷开关连接天线401或天线402。The antenna 401 shown in FIG. 4A is the above-mentioned second antenna, and the antenna 402 is the first antenna. The antenna a shown in FIG. 3 may include the antenna 401 and the antenna 402 shown in FIG. 4A . The wireless communication module 308 shown in FIG. 3 may be the wireless communication module 403 shown in FIG. 4A ; the MCU 404 shown in FIG. 4A may be implemented by the processor 301 shown in FIG. 3 . The above-mentioned wireless communication module 403 may be a Wi-Fi chip, and a radio frequency input/output (RFIO) pin of the wireless communication module 403 is connected to the antenna 401 or the antenna 402 through a SPDT switch.
其中,MCU 404可以包括中央处理器,内存,计数器,时钟,中断,串行外设接口(serial peripheral interface,SPI),UART接口,通用串行总线接口等。其中,UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线,将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。The MCU 404 may include a central processing unit, a memory, a counter, a clock, an interrupt, a serial peripheral interface (SPI), a UART interface, a universal serial bus interface, and the like. Among them, the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus that converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
在一些实施例中,MCU 404通过UART接口与无线通信模块403交互信息。其中,无线通信模块403用于实现音箱300与其他设备(如手机)的无线通信。无线通信模块403的详细描述可以参考上述实施例对无线通信模块308的详细介绍,这里不予赘述。In some embodiments, the MCU 404 exchanges information with the wireless communication module 403 through the UART interface. The wireless communication module 403 is used to realize wireless communication between the speaker 300 and other devices (eg, mobile phones). For the detailed description of the wireless communication module 403, reference may be made to the detailed description of the wireless communication module 308 in the above-mentioned embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
其中,天线401和天线402可用于发射和接收电磁波。进一步的,无线通信模块403可将从天线401或天线402接收的电磁波转换为信号,并将信号发送至MCU 404进行处理。或者无线通信模块403可从MCU 404接收待发送的信号,经由天线401或 天线402转为电磁波辐射出去。本申请实施例中,天线402发射信号的第一距离小于天线401发射信号的第二距离。Among them, the antenna 401 and the antenna 402 can be used to transmit and receive electromagnetic waves. Further, the wireless communication module 403 can convert the electromagnetic waves received from the antenna 401 or the antenna 402 into signals, and send the signals to the MCU 404 for processing. Or the wireless communication module 403 can receive the signal to be sent from the MCU 404, and radiate it into electromagnetic waves via the antenna 401 or the antenna 402. In this embodiment of the present application, the first distance over which the antenna 402 transmits the signal is smaller than the second distance over which the antenna 401 transmits the signal.
在一些实施例中,MCU 404可以控制天线401与天线402的切换。当音箱300采用天线401时,如果音箱300与其他设备(如手机)之间的距离小于第二距离,其它设备(如手机)则能够接收到音箱300通过天线402发射的信号,从而实现其他设备与音箱300的通信;当音箱300采用天线402时,如果音箱300与其他设备(如手机)之间的距离小于第一距离,其他设备则能够接收到音箱300通过天线402发射的信号,从而实现其他设备与音箱300的通信。In some embodiments, the MCU 404 can control the switching of the antenna 401 and the antenna 402. When the speaker 300 adopts the antenna 401, if the distance between the speaker 300 and other devices (such as mobile phones) is less than the second distance, the other devices (such as mobile phones) can receive the signals transmitted by the speaker 300 through the antenna 402, thereby realizing other devices. Communication with the speaker 300; when the speaker 300 adopts the antenna 402, if the distance between the speaker 300 and other devices (such as mobile phones) is less than the first distance, the other devices can receive the signal transmitted by the speaker 300 through the antenna 402, thereby realizing Communication of other devices with the speaker 300 .
示例性的,音箱300可以采用天线401向周围的设备发送第一消息或第二消息;音箱300可以通过天线402接收其他设备发送的NAN发布消息。音箱300还可以通过天线401或天线402接入Wi-Fi路由器。Exemplarily, the speaker 300 can use the antenna 401 to send the first message or the second message to the surrounding devices; the speaker 300 can receive the NAN announcement message sent by other devices through the antenna 402 . The speaker 300 can also be connected to a Wi-Fi router through the antenna 401 or the antenna 402 .
在另一些实施例中,上述第二天线和第一天线可以共用一部分走线,例如图4B-图4D所示实施例中的描述。In other embodiments, the above-mentioned second antenna and the first antenna may share a part of the wiring, for example, as described in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 4B-4D .
本申请实施例音箱300通过第一天线来实现超短距通信。本申请实施例中音箱300中的双天线(第一天线以及第二天线)可以通过射频开关进行切换。物理上可以将第一天线与射频开关(如图4B-图4D中虚线框中所示为第一天线)都置于屏蔽罩内或者将第一天线置于芯片内。图4B-图4D示出了三种第一天线的结构示意图。The speaker 300 in the embodiment of the present application implements ultra-short-range communication through the first antenna. In the embodiment of the present application, the dual antennas (the first antenna and the second antenna) in the sound box 300 can be switched by a radio frequency switch. Physically, both the first antenna and the radio frequency switch (the first antenna is shown in the dashed box in FIG. 4B to FIG. 4D ) can be placed in the shielding case or the first antenna can be placed in the chip. 4B-4D show schematic structural diagrams of three kinds of first antennas.
本申请实施例中的第一天线的目的就是要尽可能减小发射距离。构造第一天线的原理可以是:The purpose of the first antenna in the embodiment of the present application is to reduce the transmission distance as much as possible. The principle of constructing the first antenna may be:
(1)减小天线长度,从而减小辐射到空气中的电磁波;(1) Reduce the length of the antenna, thereby reducing the electromagnetic waves radiated into the air;
(2)减小辐射效率,通过电阻将一部分的电磁波辐射转化为热能消耗掉;(2) Reduce the radiation efficiency, and convert a part of the electromagnetic wave radiation into heat energy and consume it through the resistance;
(3)降低回波损耗,将部分射频能量反射回芯片内部等。(3) Reduce the return loss, reflect part of the radio frequency energy back into the chip, etc.
第一天线具体的实现可以采用:The specific implementation of the first antenna may adopt:
(1)将天线变短;(1) Shorten the antenna;
(2)将真天线路径中某点断开,或者在该点通过电阻、电感或者电容接地;(2) Disconnect a certain point in the true antenna path, or ground it through a resistance, inductance or capacitance at this point;
(3)使用屏蔽罩等。(3) Use a shield, etc.
应理解,上述第一天线具体的实现(1)和(2)可以在PCB板上或者芯片内部实现。It should be understood that the specific implementation (1) and (2) of the above-mentioned first antenna may be implemented on a PCB board or inside a chip.
还应理解,上述屏蔽罩的作用是隔断天线辐射电磁波到接收器的路径,以达到削弱辐射的目的。It should also be understood that the function of the above-mentioned shielding cover is to cut off the path from the electromagnetic wave radiated by the antenna to the receiver, so as to achieve the purpose of weakening the radiation.
还应理解,上述将天线变短是指第一天线相比于第二天线来说,第一天线更短。图4B至图4D所示的三种第一天线的结构,第一天线如图4B至图4D中的虚线框中所示。图4B至图4D中第二天线的结构都是通过RFIO引脚连接滤波电路(例如,π型电路)、匹配电路(例如,π型电路)以及匹配电路外的天线体(例如,该天线体可以是一段金属走线)。图4B中虚线框所示的第一天线a、图4C中虚线框所示的第一天线b以及图4D中虚线框所示的第一天线c的长度不同,但是相比于第二天线都更短。滤波电路的作用是防止干扰,匹配电路是用来与第二天线匹配。It should also be understood that the above-mentioned shortening of the antenna means that the first antenna is shorter than the second antenna. The structures of the three first antennas are shown in FIGS. 4B to 4D , and the first antennas are shown in the dashed boxes in FIGS. 4B to 4D . The structures of the second antenna in FIGS. 4B to 4D are all connected to a filter circuit (eg, a π-type circuit), a matching circuit (eg, a π-type circuit), and an antenna body outside the matching circuit (eg, the antenna body) through RFIO pins. Can be a piece of metal trace). The lengths of the first antenna a shown in the dashed box in FIG. 4B , the first antenna b shown in the dashed box in FIG. 4C , and the first antenna c shown in the dashed box in FIG. 4D are different, but compared with the second antenna Shorter. The function of the filter circuit is to prevent interference, and the matching circuit is used to match the second antenna.
示例性的,如图4B所示,第一天线a可以采用屏蔽罩内Wi-Fi芯片的射频输入输出(radio frequency input/output,RFIO)引脚直接断开。其中,第一天线a可以 由RFIO引脚、走线和2路开关中的第一路开关(第一路开关不连接任何器件)组成。其中,2路开关指的是RFIO与滤波电路之间的开关,通过该开关可以将RFIO引脚与滤波电路连通或者断开;所述第一路开关为4B所示的与RFIO引脚相连、且与滤波电路之间断开的开关。应理解,本申请实施例中的2路开关可以是单刀双掷开关。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 4B , the first antenna a may be directly disconnected by using the radio frequency input/output (RFIO) pins of the Wi-Fi chip in the shield. Wherein, the first antenna a can be composed of RFIO pins, traces, and the first switch of the two switches (the first switch is not connected to any device). Among them, the 2-way switch refers to the switch between the RFIO and the filter circuit, through which the RFIO pin can be connected or disconnected from the filter circuit; the first-way switch is the one shown in 4B that is connected to the RFIO pin, And the switch disconnected from the filter circuit. It should be understood that the 2-way switch in the embodiment of the present application may be a single-pole double-throw switch.
示例性的,如图4C所示,第一天线b可以采用屏蔽罩内Wi-Fi芯片的RFIO通过匹配器件(例如,电阻)到地。其中,第一天线b可以由RFIO引脚、走线、2路开关的第一路开关(第一路开关连接电阻)以及电阻组成。通过电阻接地可以将一部分的电磁波辐射转化为热能消耗掉,从而减小了第一天线b的辐射效率。其中,所述2路开关指的是RFIO引脚与电阻、滤波电路之间的开关,通过该开关,可以将RFIO引脚与电阻相连、与滤波电路断开,或者可以将RFIO引脚与电阻断开、而与滤波电路相连通。所述的第一路开关为与电阻相连、且与滤波电路断开的开关。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 4C , the first antenna b may use the RFIO of the Wi-Fi chip in the shield to connect to the ground through a matching device (for example, a resistor). The first antenna b may be composed of RFIO pins, traces, the first switch of the 2-way switch (the first switch is connected to a resistor), and a resistor. Part of the electromagnetic wave radiation can be converted into heat energy and consumed by grounding the resistance, thereby reducing the radiation efficiency of the first antenna b. The 2-way switch refers to the switch between the RFIO pin and the resistor and the filter circuit. Through this switch, the RFIO pin can be connected to the resistor and disconnected from the filter circuit, or the RFIO pin can be connected to the resistor. disconnected and connected to the filter circuit. The first switch is a switch connected to the resistor and disconnected from the filter circuit.
示例性的,如图4D所示,第一天线c可以采用屏蔽罩内Wi-Fi芯片的RFIO引脚过芯片匹配的滤波电路电路后接匹配器件(例如,电阻)到地。第一天线c可以由RFIO引脚、走线、滤波电路、2路开关的第一路开关(第一路开关连接电阻)以及电阻组成。通过电阻接地可以将一部分的电磁波辐射转化为热能消耗掉,从而减小了第一天线b的辐射效率。其中,所述2路开关指的是屏蔽罩内的滤波电路与电阻、屏蔽罩外的匹配电路之间的开关,通过该开关,可以将屏蔽罩内的滤波电路与电阻相连、与屏蔽罩外的匹配电路断开,或者可以将屏蔽罩内的滤波电路与电阻断开、而与屏蔽罩外的匹配电路相连通。所述的第一路开关为连接屏蔽罩内的滤波电路与电阻的开关。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 4D , the first antenna c may use the RFIO pin of the Wi-Fi chip in the shield to connect to the ground through a filter circuit circuit matched with the chip and then a matching device (eg, a resistor). The first antenna c may be composed of RFIO pins, traces, filter circuits, the first switch of the 2-way switch (the first switch is connected to a resistor), and a resistor. Part of the electromagnetic wave radiation can be converted into heat energy and consumed by grounding the resistance, thereby reducing the radiation efficiency of the first antenna b. The 2-way switch refers to the switch between the filter circuit in the shield and the resistor and the matching circuit outside the shield. Through this switch, the filter circuit in the shield can be connected with the resistor and connected with the outside of the shield. The matching circuit is disconnected, or the filter circuit in the shield can be disconnected from the resistor and connected with the matching circuit outside the shield. The first switch is a switch that connects the filter circuit and the resistor in the shield.
应理解,上述图4B至图4C中的第二天线可以由RFIO引脚、走线、2路开关中的第二路开关,滤波电路、匹配电路以及匹配电路外连接的天线体组成。所述第二路开关为连接RFIO引脚与滤波电路的开关。It should be understood that the second antenna in FIG. 4B to FIG. 4C may be composed of RFIO pins, traces, the second switch in the 2-way switch, a filter circuit, a matching circuit, and an antenna body connected outside the matching circuit. The second switch is a switch connecting the RFIO pin and the filter circuit.
上述图4D中的第二天线可以由RFIO引脚、滤波电路、走线、2路开关中的第二路开关、匹配电路以及匹配电路外连接的天线体组成。所述第二路开关为连接屏蔽罩内的滤波电路与屏蔽罩外的匹配电路的开关。The second antenna in FIG. 4D may be composed of RFIO pins, filter circuits, traces, the second switch of the 2-way switches, a matching circuit, and an antenna body connected to the outside of the matching circuit. The second switch is a switch that connects the filter circuit inside the shield and the matching circuit outside the shield.
应理解,上述图4A所示的无线通信模块403可以是图4B至图4C中所述的Wi-Fi芯片。It should be understood that the wireless communication module 403 shown in FIG. 4A may be the Wi-Fi chip described in FIG. 4B to FIG. 4C .
以上不同的第一天线结构配合Wi-Fi芯片的不同发射功率(Tx power)的设置,可以达到不同超短距通讯的要求(例如,从10cm到2m)。The above different first antenna structures, combined with the different transmit power (Tx power) settings of the Wi-Fi chip, can meet different ultra-short-distance communication requirements (for example, from 10cm to 2m).
示例性的,表1示出了几种不同的第一天线结构配合不同发射功率的通讯距离。Exemplarily, Table 1 shows the communication distances of several different first antenna structures with different transmit powers.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2021113271-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021113271-appb-000001
由于芯片内物理器件的特性,天线最大发射功率和最小发射功率之差是相关联的。如果把音箱300的最小发射功率降得很低,则最大发射功率也会被降低,这样就不满足正常工作时的距离要求。本申请实施例中,由于不同的智能设备的结构不同以及对 智能设备的安全性能要求不同,所以智能设备的生产厂商可以采用不同的第一天线结构以及发射功率来保证智能设备的通讯距离。示例性的,对于不同的智能空调生产厂商,其智能空调外壳的厚度可能不同,那么在第一天线结构相同以及发射功率相同的情况下,智能空调能够被发现的通讯距离也可能不同。不同的智能设备生产厂商可以根据其智能设备本身的结构,配合第一天线的结构以及一定的发射功率,从而测试出智能设备被发现的安全距离。Due to the characteristics of the physical device on the chip, the difference between the maximum transmit power and the minimum transmit power of the antenna is correlated. If the minimum transmission power of the speaker 300 is reduced very low, the maximum transmission power will also be reduced, so that the distance requirement during normal operation cannot be met. In the embodiment of the present application, since different smart devices have different structures and different requirements for the security performance of the smart devices, manufacturers of smart devices can use different first antenna structures and transmit powers to ensure the communication distance of the smart devices. Exemplarily, for different smart air conditioner manufacturers, the thickness of the smart air conditioner housing may be different, so under the condition of the same first antenna structure and the same transmit power, the communication distance at which the smart air conditioner can be discovered may also be different. Different smart device manufacturers can test the safe distance at which the smart device can be discovered according to the structure of the smart device itself, in conjunction with the structure of the first antenna and a certain transmit power.
结合上述示例,以第二距离是5米,第一距离是0.3米为例。当音箱300采用第二天线(即强天线)时,如果音箱300与其他设备(如手机)之间的距离小于第二距离(如其他设备位于图4E所示的位置1),音箱300可与其他设备(如音箱)通信;当音箱300采用第一天线(即弱天线)时,如果音箱300与其他设备(如手机)之间的距离小于第一距离(如其他设备位于图4E所示的位置2),音箱300可与其他设备(如手机)通信。In combination with the above examples, it is assumed that the second distance is 5 meters and the first distance is 0.3 meters. When the speaker 300 adopts a second antenna (ie, a strong antenna), if the distance between the speaker 300 and other devices (such as mobile phones) is smaller than the second distance (such as the other devices are located at position 1 shown in FIG. 4E ), the speaker 300 can be connected to Communication with other devices (such as speakers); when the speaker 300 uses the first antenna (ie, a weak antenna), if the distance between the speaker 300 and other devices (such as mobile phones) is less than the first distance (such as the other devices are located in Figure 4E ) Position 2), the speaker 300 can communicate with other devices (such as mobile phones).
音箱300通过GPU,显示屏306,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏306和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器301可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The speaker 300 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 306, and the application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 306 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 301 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
显示屏306用于显示图像,视频等。该显示屏306包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用LCD,OLED,AMOLED,FLED,Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,QLED等。例如,本申请实施例中,显示屏306可用于显示音箱300所播放的音频数据对应的图像内容,以及音箱300的操作界面等。Display screen 306 is used to display images, videos, and the like. The display screen 306 includes a display panel. The display panel can adopt LCD, OLED, AMOLED, FLED, Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, QLED, etc. For example, in the embodiment of the present application, the display screen 306 may be used to display the image content corresponding to the audio data played by the speaker 300 , the operation interface of the speaker 300 , and the like.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。音箱300可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,音箱300可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:MPEG1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. Speaker 300 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the sound box 300 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, such as: MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
内部存储器303可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器301通过运行存储在内部存储器303的指令,从而执行音箱300的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器303可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储音箱300使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频播放记录)等。此外,内部存储器303可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,UFS等。Internal memory 303 may be used to store computer executable program code including instructions. The processor 301 executes various functional applications and data processing of the speaker 300 by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 303 . The internal memory 303 may include a storage program area and a storage data area. The storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like. The storage data area can store data (such as audio playback records) created during the use of the speaker 300 and the like. In addition, the internal memory 303 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, UFS, and the like.
外部存储器接口302可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展广告设备120的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口302与处理器301通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 302 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the advertising device 120. The external memory card communicates with the processor 301 through the external memory interface 302 to realize the data storage function. For example to save files like music, video etc in external memory card.
音箱300可以通过音频模块307,扬声器307A和麦克风307B,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音,语音采集等。The speaker 300 can implement audio functions through an audio module 307, a speaker 307A, a microphone 307B, an application processor, and the like. Such as music playback, recording, voice capture, etc.
音频模块307用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块307还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块307可以设置于处理器301中,或将音频模块307的部分功能模块设置于处理器301中。扬声器307A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音 信号。麦克风407B,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于采集声音信号,并将声音信号转换为电信号。The audio module 307 is used for converting digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and also for converting analog audio input into digital audio signal. Audio module 307 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 307 may be provided in the processor 301 , or some functional modules of the audio module 307 may be provided in the processor 301 . Speaker 307A, also referred to as "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The microphone 407B, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to collect sound signals and convert the sound signals into electrical signals.
以下实施例中的方法均可以在具有上述硬件结构的电子设备200和具有上述硬件结构的音箱300中实现。以下实施例中以上述电子设备200是图1所示的手机100,图1所示的音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205参与组合构建组合音箱为例,介绍本申请实施例的方法。The methods in the following embodiments can all be implemented in the electronic device 200 having the above-mentioned hardware structure and the sound box 300 having the above-mentioned hardware structure. In the following embodiments, the above-mentioned electronic device 200 is the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1 , and the sound box 201 , sound box 202 , sound box 203 , sound box 204 and sound box 205 shown in FIG. Methods.
需要注意的是,手机100需要与音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205分别交互,以实现组合音箱的配置。为了便于理解,以下实施例中以手机100与音箱201和音箱202交互为例,介绍手机100配置组合音箱的过程中,手机100与音箱的交互方式。It should be noted that the mobile phone 100 needs to interact with the speaker 201 , the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 and the speaker 205 respectively, so as to realize the configuration of the combined speaker. For ease of understanding, in the following embodiments, the interaction between the mobile phone 100 and the speakers 201 and 202 is used as an example to introduce the interaction between the mobile phone 100 and the speakers in the process of configuring the combined speakers on the mobile phone 100 .
本申请实施例提供一种组合音箱的配置方法,如图5所示,该组合音箱的配置方法可以包括S501-S523。An embodiment of the present application provides a configuration method of a combined sound box. As shown in FIG. 5 , the configuration method of the combined sound box may include S501-S523.
S501、音箱(如音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205)订阅临近感知网络(neighborhood aware network,NAN)服务。S501, speakers (eg, speakers 201, 202, 203, 204, and 205) subscribe to a proximity awareness network (NAN) service.
示例性的,音箱上可以设置有预设按键。该预设按键用于触发音箱订阅NAN服务。例如,该预设按键可以称为“配网”按键。例如,上述预设按键可以是设置在音箱的上表面或者音箱的任一侧面的物理按键。本申请实施例中,对上述预设按键在音箱中的位置不作限制。或者,音箱可以包括显示屏,上述预设按键可以是显示屏上显示的虚拟按键。Exemplarily, preset buttons may be provided on the speaker. This preset button is used to trigger the speaker to subscribe to the NAN service. For example, the preset button may be called a "network distribution" button. For example, the above-mentioned preset keys may be physical keys disposed on the upper surface of the sound box or on any side of the sound box. In the embodiment of the present application, the position of the preset button in the sound box is not limited. Alternatively, the sound box may include a display screen, and the above-mentioned preset keys may be virtual keys displayed on the display screen.
其中,响应于用户对该“配网”按键的操作1(如单击操作、双击操作或者长按操作等),音箱可以订阅NAN服务。例如,响应于用户对“配网”按键的操作1,音箱可以进入配网模式。在配网模式下,音箱可以自动订阅NAN服务。Among them, in response to the user's operation 1 (such as a single-click operation, a double-click operation, or a long-press operation, etc.) on the "distribution network" button, the speaker can subscribe to the NAN service. For example, in response to the user's operation 1 on the "distribution network" button, the speaker can enter the network distribution mode. In the distribution network mode, the speaker can automatically subscribe to the NAN service.
其中,NAN服务也称为WiFi感知服务。NAN机制是由WiFi联盟(WiFi alliance,WFA)提出的基于WiFi技术的一个标准。在NAN机制中,多个具有NAN功能的设备(简称NAN设备)形成的NAN网络称为簇(cluster)。簇中的每个NAN设备都可以在该簇的发现窗口(discovery window,DW)中进行服务发现,以发现能够与其进行数据传输的其他NAN设备。Among them, the NAN service is also called the WiFi awareness service. The NAN mechanism is a standard based on WiFi technology proposed by the WiFi Alliance (WFA). In the NAN mechanism, a NAN network formed by a plurality of devices with NAN functions (NAN devices for short) is called a cluster. Each NAN device in a cluster can perform service discovery in the discovery window (DW) of the cluster to discover other NAN devices that can transmit data with it.
具体的,本申请实施例中,音箱订阅NAN服务具体是指:音箱激活或启动NAN功能。其中,一个设备激活或启动NAN设备后,可以基于自身的媒体存取控制(media access control,MAC)地址设定一个身份标识(identity,ID)。并且,一个设备在激活或启动NAN功能后,如果接收到来自其他设备的NAN发布消息,便可以响应该NAN发布消息回复相应的响应消息。Specifically, in the embodiment of the present application, subscribing the speaker to the NAN service specifically refers to: the speaker activates or starts the NAN function. Among them, after a device activates or starts the NAN device, it can set an identity (identity, ID) based on its own media access control (media access control, MAC) address. Moreover, after a device activates or starts the NAN function, if it receives a NAN release message from another device, it can respond to the NAN release message and reply with a corresponding response message.
示例性的,以图1所示的五个音箱参与组合,用于构建组合音箱为例。图1所示的音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205可以响应于用户对各自的预设按键的操作1,分别进入订阅NAN服务。Exemplarily, take the five sound boxes shown in FIG. 1 participating in the combination for constructing the combined sound box as an example. The speakers 201 , 202 , 203 , 204 and 205 shown in FIG. 1 can respectively enter the subscription NAN service in response to the user's operation 1 on the respective preset keys.
S502、手机100显示第一APP的第一界面,该第一界面用于触发手机100构建N声道的组合音箱。S502 , the mobile phone 100 displays a first interface of the first APP, where the first interface is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to construct an N-channel combined speaker.
其中,N≥2,N为正整数。例如,N可以为2,3,5,或者7等任一正整数。Among them, N≥2, N is a positive integer. For example, N can be any positive integer such as 2, 3, 5, or 7.
示例性的,本申请实施例中的第一APP可以为如图6所示的图标“音箱”601对 应的应用。如图6所示,手机100可接收用户对“音箱”601的点击操作;响应于该点击操作,手机100可启动第一APP,显示图7A所示的第一APP的首页701(即第一界面701)。第一界面701中包括多个组合音箱选项,如“立体声组合音箱”选项702和“环绕声组合音箱”选项703。Exemplarily, the first APP in this embodiment of the present application may be an application corresponding to the icon "speaker" 601 shown in FIG. 6 . As shown in FIG. 6 , the mobile phone 100 can receive the user's click operation on the “speaker” 601; in response to the click operation, the mobile phone 100 can start the first APP, and display the home page 701 of the first APP shown in FIG. 7A (ie the first APP). interface 701). The first interface 701 includes a plurality of combination speaker options, such as a “stereo combination speaker” option 702 and a “surround sound combination speaker” option 703 .
其中,上述组合音箱选项用于触发手机100构建组合音箱。例如,“立体声组合音箱”选项702用于触发手机100构建包括左声道和右声道的立体声的组合音箱,N=2。又例如,“环绕声组合音箱”选项703用于触发手机100构建包括左前置声道、右前置声道、中置声道、右环绕声道、左环绕声道的环绕声的组合音箱,N=5。The above combination speaker option is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to construct a combination speaker. For example, the "stereo combination speaker" option 702 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to construct a stereo combination speaker including a left channel and a right channel, N=2. For another example, the "Surround Sound Combination Speaker" option 703 is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to construct a surround sound combination speaker including a left front channel, a right front channel, a center channel, a right surround channel, and a left surround channel. , N=5.
S503、响应于操作a,手机100显示第二界面。该第二界面用于指示N个音箱的摆放布局。S503. In response to operation a, the mobile phone 100 displays a second interface. The second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers.
示例性的,该操作a是第一操作。该操作a可以是用户对图7A所示的“立体声组合音箱”选项702或“环绕声组合音箱”选项703的点击操作(如单击操作)。本申请实施例中以上述操作a触发手机100构建包括五个声道的环绕声的组合音箱为例。例如,手机100可以接收用户对“环绕声组合音箱”选项703的操作a。例如,响应于用户对图7A所示的“环绕声组合音箱”选项703的操作a,手机100可以显示图7B或图7C所示的第二界面704。图7B或图7C所示的第二界面704中包括“环绕声组合音箱”选项703对应的五个音箱的图标,并指示了这五个音箱的摆放布局。Exemplarily, the operation a is the first operation. The operation a may be a click operation (eg, a single-click operation) by the user on the "stereo sound box" option 702 or the "surround sound box" option 703 shown in FIG. 7A . In the embodiment of the present application, the above operation a triggers the mobile phone 100 to construct a combined speaker including five-channel surround sound as an example. For example, the mobile phone 100 may receive the user's operation a on the option 703 of "surround sound combination speakers". For example, in response to the user's operation a on the "surround sound combination speaker" option 703 shown in FIG. 7A , the mobile phone 100 may display the second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C . The second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C includes icons of five speakers corresponding to the "surround sound combination speakers" option 703, and indicates the placement layout of the five speakers.
在一些实施例中,上述第二界面中还包括提示信息,该提示信息用于提示用户按照第二界面所指示的摆放布局摆放上述N个音箱。例如,图7B或图7C所示的第二界面704还包括提示信息705,如“请按照以下布局摆放音箱”。In some embodiments, the above-mentioned second interface further includes prompt information, where the prompt information is used to prompt the user to place the above-mentioned N speakers according to the layout indicated by the second interface. For example, the second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C further includes prompt information 705, such as "please place the speakers according to the following layout".
在另一些实施例中,上述第二界面还可以包括电子设备为上述N个音箱分配的标识,如音箱1,音箱2,……,音箱N。In other embodiments, the above-mentioned second interface may further include identifiers assigned by the electronic device to the above-mentioned N sound boxes, such as sound box 1, sound box 2, ..., sound box N.
在另一些实施例中,上述第二界面还可以指示上述N个音箱中每个音箱的角色。例如,图7C所示的第二界面704中各个音箱的图标下方指示了对应音箱的角色,如左前置声道、右前置声道、中置声道、左环绕声道和右声道。需要说明的是,每个音箱的角色是由该音箱在N个音箱中的摆放位置决定的。In other embodiments, the above-mentioned second interface may further indicate the role of each of the above-mentioned N loudspeakers. For example, in the second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7C , the roles of the corresponding speakers are indicated below the icons of the respective speakers, such as the left front channel, the right front channel, the center channel, the left surround channel and the right channel . It should be noted that the role of each speaker is determined by the placement of the speaker in the N speakers.
可以理解,用户可以按照第二界面所指示的摆放布局,摆放图1所示的五个音箱。例如,用户可以调整图1所示的五个音箱摆放布局,调整后图1所示的音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205的摆放布局如图8所示。It can be understood that the user can place the five speakers shown in FIG. 1 according to the placement layout indicated by the second interface. For example, the user can adjust the arrangement of the five speakers shown in FIG. 1 , and the adjusted arrangement of speakers 201 , 202 , 203 , 204 , and 205 shown in FIG. 1 is shown in FIG. 8 .
如图8所示,音箱201在五个音箱中的摆放位置与图7B或图7C所示的左前置声道的摆放位置对应;音箱202在五个音箱中的摆放位置与图7B或图7C所示的右前置声道的摆放位置对应;音箱203在五个音箱中的摆放位置与图7B或图7C所述的中前置声道的摆放位置对应;音箱204在五个音箱中的摆放位置与图7B或图7C所述的左环绕声道的摆放位置对应;音箱205在五个音箱中的摆放位置与图7B或图7C所述的右环绕声道的摆放位置对应。As shown in FIG. 8, the placement position of the speaker 201 in the five speakers corresponds to the placement position of the left front channel shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C; the placement position of the speaker 202 in the five speakers is the same as that shown in FIG. The placement position of the right front channel shown in 7B or FIG. 7C corresponds; the placement position of the sound box 203 in the five sound boxes corresponds to the placement position of the middle front channel described in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C ; The placement position of 204 in the five speakers corresponds to the placement position of the left surround channel described in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C ; The placement of the surround channels corresponds.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,可以先执行S501,再执行S502-S503;也可以先执行S502-S503,再执行S501;或者,还可以在执行S502-S503的同时,执行S501。本申请实施例对S501和S502-S503执行的先后顺序不做限制。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, S501 may be executed first, and then S502-S503 may be executed; S502-S503 may also be executed first, and then S501 may be executed; or, S501 may also be executed while executing S502-S503. This embodiment of the present application does not limit the sequence of execution of S501 and S502-S503.
S504、响应于用户在第二界面的操作b,手机100广播NAN发布消息。S504. In response to the user's operation b on the second interface, the mobile phone 100 broadcasts a NAN release message.
示例性的,该操作b是第二操作。该操作b可以是用户对第二界面中预设控件的点击操作(如单击操作、双击操作或长按操作)。该预设控件用于触发手机100开始为N个音箱配网。例如,预设控件可以为“开始配网”控件。上述操作b是用户对图7B或图7C所示的第二界面704中“开始配网”控件706的点击操作。Exemplarily, the operation b is the second operation. The operation b may be a user's click operation (such as a single-click operation, a double-click operation, or a long-press operation) on a preset control in the second interface. The preset control is used to trigger the mobile phone 100 to start network configuration for the N speakers. For example, the preset control may be a "start network configuration" control. The above operation b is a click operation by the user on the "start network configuration" control 706 in the second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C .
或者,上述操作b还可以是用户在第二界面中输入的预设手势,如S形手势,L形手势,双指向上滑动手势或者三指向上滑动手势等。以下实施例中,以操作b是用户对第二界面中预设控件的点击操作为例。Alternatively, the above operation b may also be a preset gesture input by the user in the second interface, such as an S-shaped gesture, an L-shaped gesture, a two-finger upward sliding gesture or a three-finger sliding upward gesture, and the like. In the following embodiments, it is taken as an example that operation b is a user's click operation on a preset control in the second interface.
如图7B或图7C所示,响应于用户对“开始配网”控件706的操作b,手机100可以发布NAN服务。本申请实施例中,手机100发布NAN服务,具体是指:手机100广播NAN发布消息。由上述实施例可知:图8所示的音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205均已订阅NAN服务。因此,图8所示的音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205均可以接收并响应于该NAN发布消息。As shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C, in response to the user's operation b on the "start network configuration" control 706, the mobile phone 100 may publish the NAN service. In the embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone 100 publishes the NAN service, which specifically refers to: the mobile phone 100 broadcasts the NAN publishing message. It can be known from the above embodiment that the speaker 201, the speaker 202, the speaker 203, the speaker 204, and the speaker 205 shown in FIG. 8 have all subscribed to the NAN service. Therefore, the sound box 201, the sound box 202, the sound box 203, the sound box 204, and the sound box 205 shown in FIG. 8 can all receive and publish messages in response to the NAN.
S505、手机100显示第三界面。该第三界面用于提示用户将手机100靠近角色1的音箱,使手机100与角色1的音箱之间的距离在第一距离内。S505, the mobile phone 100 displays a third interface. The third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 1, so that the distance between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker of the character 1 is within the first distance.
其中,上述角色1是第一角色。例如,响应于用户对“开始配网”控件706的操作b,手机100可以显示图9A所示的第三界面901。该第三界面901用于提示用户将手机100靠近角色1(如左前置声道)的音箱。Among them, the above-mentioned character 1 is the first character. For example, in response to the user's operation b on the "start network configuration" control 706, the mobile phone 100 may display the third interface 901 shown in FIG. 9A. The third interface 901 is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 1 (eg, the left front channel).
例如,该第三界面901包括提示信息902,如“请将手机靠近角色为左前置声道的音箱”。其中,角色1可以为上述N个音箱中任一个音箱的角色。例如,在图9A所示的第三界面901,角色1为左前置声道,该角色1的音箱是图8所示的音箱201。For example, the third interface 901 includes prompt information 902, such as "please bring the mobile phone close to the speaker whose role is the left front channel". The role 1 may be the role of any one of the above N speakers. For example, in the third interface 901 shown in FIG. 9A , the character 1 is the left front channel, and the speaker of the character 1 is the speaker 201 shown in FIG. 8 .
可选的,手机100还可以在第三界面以预先方式显示上述角色1的音箱的图标。例如,响应于用户对“开始配网”控件706的操作b,手机100可以显示图9B所示的第三界面903。其中,第三界面903中以标黑的方式显示角色1(如左前置声道)的音箱的图标。这样,可以直观的将角色1的音箱与其他角色的音箱区分开来,便于用户快速定位出该角色1的音箱在N个音箱中的摆放位置。Optionally, the mobile phone 100 may also display the above-mentioned icon of the speaker of the character 1 in a predetermined manner on the third interface. For example, in response to the user's operation b on the "start network configuration" control 706, the mobile phone 100 may display the third interface 903 shown in FIG. 9B. Wherein, the icon of the speaker of the character 1 (eg, the left front channel) is displayed in the third interface 903 in the form of a black mark. In this way, the speaker of the character 1 can be intuitively distinguished from the speakers of other characters, so that the user can quickly locate the position of the speaker of the character 1 among the N speakers.
需要说明的是,上述预设方式包括但不限于图9B中显示左前置声道的音箱的图标的方式,其他的显示方式此处不予赘述。It should be noted that the above-mentioned preset manners include but are not limited to the manner in which the icon of the speaker of the left front channel is displayed in FIG. 9B , and other display manners are not repeated here.
可以理解,如S501中所述,音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205均订阅了NAN服务,即激活或启动了NAN功能。因此,订阅了NAN服务的音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205便可以接收到手机100广播的NAN发布消息。具体的,在上述S504之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S506。It can be understood that, as described in S501, the speaker 201, the speaker 202, the speaker 203, the speaker 204, and the speaker 205 are all subscribed to the NAN service, that is, the NAN function is activated or started. Therefore, the speaker 201 , the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 , and the speaker 205 subscribed to the NAN service can receive the NAN release message broadcast by the mobile phone 100 . Specifically, after the above S504, the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S506.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,可以先执行S504广播NAN发布消息,再执行S505;也可以先执行S505,再执行S504广播NAN发布消息;或者,还可以在执行S504广播NAN发布消息的同时,执行S505。本申请实施例对手机100广播NAN发布消息和S505执行的先后顺序不做限制。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, S504 may be performed first to broadcast the NAN release message, and then S505 may be performed; or S505 may be performed first, and then S504 may be performed to broadcast the NAN release message; At the same time, S505 is performed. This embodiment of the present application does not limit the sequence in which the mobile phone 100 broadcasts the NAN release message and performs S505.
S506、音箱(如音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205)接收手机100广播的NAN发布消息。S506 , the speakers (eg, the speakers 201 , 202 , 203 , 204 , and 205 ) receive the NAN release message broadcast by the mobile phone 100 .
其中,音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205接收到上述NAN发布消息后,可以响应该NAN发布消息。The speaker 201 , the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 , and the speaker 205 may respond to the NAN release message after receiving the above-mentioned NAN release message.
一般而言,订阅了NAN服务的设备响应该NAN发布消息,可以回复相应的响应消息。本申请实施例中,订阅了NAN服务的音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205在接收到NAN发布消息后,可以将音箱的天线切换为弱天线,然后使用弱天线回复相应的响应消息。具体的,在S506之后本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S507-S508。Generally speaking, a device subscribed to the NAN service can reply with a corresponding response message in response to the NAN publication message. In the embodiment of the present application, after the speaker 201, speaker 202, speaker 203, speaker 204, and speaker 205 subscribed to the NAN service receive the NAN release message, they can switch the antenna of the speaker to a weak antenna, and then use the weak antenna to reply to the corresponding response message. Specifically, after S506, the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S507-S508.
S507、音箱(如音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205)使用弱天线。S507, the speakers (eg, the speakers 201, the speakers 202, the speakers 203, the speakers 204, and the speakers 205) use weak antennas.
需要说明的是,音箱(如音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205)在执行S501-S506的过程中,使用强天线实现无线通信。当音箱接收到上述NAN发布消息后,便可以使用弱天线进行无线通信。其中,强天线是第二天线,弱天线是第一天线。强天线、弱天线,以及音箱使用弱天线的原理,可以参考上述实施例中的相关描述,此处不予赘述。It should be noted that the speakers (eg, the speakers 201 , 202 , 203 , 204 , and 205 ) use strong antennas to implement wireless communication in the process of executing S501 to S506 . When the speaker receives the above-mentioned NAN release message, it can use the weak antenna for wireless communication. The strong antenna is the second antenna, and the weak antenna is the first antenna. For the strong antenna, the weak antenna, and the principle of using the weak antenna for the speaker, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
S508、音箱201使用弱天线广播消息1。该消息1中包括音箱201的ID 1和秘钥1。S508, the speaker 201 broadcasts the message 1 by using a weak antenna. The message 1 includes the ID 1 and the secret key 1 of the speaker 201.
其中,由于上述消息1是音箱1使用弱天线(也称为超短距天线)广播的;因此,该消息1也称为短距消息,如短距消息1。该消息1是第一消息。音箱201是第一音箱。ID 1是第一音箱的标识。秘钥1是第一秘钥。音箱201的ID 1用于标识音箱201。例如,音箱201的ID 1可以是音箱201的MAC地址;或者,音箱201的ID 1可以是音箱201的其他标识。上述秘钥1可以是音箱201随机生成的秘钥。Among them, since the above message 1 is broadcast by the speaker 1 using a weak antenna (also called an ultra-short-range antenna); therefore, the message 1 is also called a short-range message, such as a short-range message 1 . This message 1 is the first message. The speaker 201 is the first speaker. ID 1 is the identification of the first speaker. Key 1 is the first key. The ID 1 of the speaker 201 is used to identify the speaker 201. For example, the ID 1 of the speaker 201 may be the MAC address of the speaker 201; or, the ID 1 of the speaker 201 may be other identifiers of the speaker 201. The above key 1 may be a key randomly generated by the speaker 201 .
S509、音箱202使用弱天线广播消息2。该消息2中包括音箱202的ID 2和秘钥2。S509, the speaker 202 broadcasts the message 2 using a weak antenna. The message 2 includes the ID 2 and the secret key 2 of the speaker 202.
其中,由于上述消息2是音箱2使用弱天线(也称为超短距天线)广播的;因此,该消息2也称为短距消息,如短距消息2。该消息2是第二消息。音箱202是第二音箱。ID 2是第二音箱的标识。秘钥2是第二秘钥。音箱202的ID 2用于标识音箱202。例如,音箱202的ID 2可以是音箱202的MAC地址;或者,音箱202的ID 2可以是音箱202的其他标识。上述秘钥2可以是音箱202随机生成的秘钥。Among them, since the above-mentioned message 2 is broadcast by the speaker 2 using a weak antenna (also called an ultra-short-range antenna); therefore, the message 2 is also called a short-range message, such as a short-range message 2. This message 2 is the second message. The speaker 202 is the second speaker. ID 2 is the identification of the second speaker. Key 2 is the second key. The ID 2 of the speaker 202 is used to identify the speaker 202 . For example, the ID 2 of the speaker 202 may be the MAC address of the speaker 202; or, the ID 2 of the speaker 202 may be other identifiers of the speaker 202. The above-mentioned secret key 2 may be a secret key randomly generated by the speaker 202 .
需要说明的是,参与组合的其他音箱(如音箱203、音箱204、音箱205)也会使用弱天线广播短距消息。该短距消息中包括对应音箱的ID和相应的秘钥。本申请实施例这里以音箱201和音箱202为例,介绍本申请实施例的方法。It should be noted that other speakers participating in the combination (eg, speaker 203 , speaker 204 , and speaker 205 ) also use weak antennas to broadcast short-range messages. The short-range message includes the ID of the corresponding speaker and the corresponding secret key. In this embodiment of the present application, the sound box 201 and the sound box 202 are used as examples to introduce the method of the embodiment of the present application.
其中,音箱(如音箱201或音箱202)使用弱天线进行无线通信的有效传输距离为第一距离。音箱(如音箱201或音箱202)使用强天线进行无线通信的有效传输距离为第二距离。例如,上述第二距离可以为5米,3米,4米或者6米等任一距离长度。上述第一距离为0.3米、0.4米或者0.35米等小于1米的距离长度。Wherein, the effective transmission distance of the speaker (such as the speaker 201 or the speaker 202 ) using a weak antenna for wireless communication is the first distance. The effective transmission distance of the speaker (such as the speaker 201 or the speaker 202) using a strong antenna for wireless communication is the second distance. For example, the above-mentioned second distance may be any distance length such as 5 meters, 3 meters, 4 meters or 6 meters. The above-mentioned first distance is a distance length less than 1 meter, such as 0.3 meters, 0.4 meters, or 0.35 meters.
也就是说,当音箱(如音箱201)采用强天线时,如果音箱与手机100之间的距离小于第二距离,音箱300可与其他设备(如手机)通信;当音箱采用弱天线时,如果音箱与手机100之间的距离小于第一距离,音箱可与手机100通信。That is to say, when the speaker (such as the speaker 201) adopts a strong antenna, if the distance between the speaker and the mobile phone 100 is smaller than the second distance, the speaker 300 can communicate with other devices (such as the mobile phone); when the speaker adopts a weak antenna, if the distance between the speaker and the mobile phone 100 is smaller than the second distance The distance between the speaker and the mobile phone 100 is smaller than the first distance, and the speaker can communicate with the mobile phone 100 .
可以理解,音箱(如音箱201和音箱202)使用弱天线进行无线通信的有效传输距离为第一距离(如0.3米)。只有当其他设备(如手机100)与音箱之间的距离小于第一距离,才可以接收到音箱发送的短距消息。而其他与音箱之间距离大于第一距 离的设备,则不能接收到音箱发送的短距消息。这样的超短距离通信,可以保证音箱发送的短距消息不被其他设备接收到,可以避免由于其他设备获取到音箱的秘钥与音箱交互从而操作音箱,可以保证手机100与音箱之间数据传输的安全性。It can be understood that the effective transmission distance of the speakers (eg, the speakers 201 and 202 ) using weak antennas for wireless communication is the first distance (eg, 0.3 meters). Only when the distance between other devices (eg, the mobile phone 100 ) and the speaker is less than the first distance, the short-range message sent by the speaker can be received. Other devices whose distance from the speaker is greater than the first distance cannot receive short-range messages sent by the speaker. Such ultra-short-range communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's secret key and interact with the speaker, and can ensure data transmission between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker. security.
在S505之后,如图8所示,用户将手机100靠近角色1的音箱(如音箱201)。用户将手机100靠近角色1的音箱201,使手机100与音箱201之间的距离在第一距离内之后,手机100便可以接收到音箱201发送的消息1。而手机100并未靠近音箱202;因此,手机100并不能接收到音箱202发送的消息2。如图5所示,在S508之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S510。After S505 , as shown in FIG. 8 , the user brings the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of character 1 (eg, speaker 201 ). After the user places the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker 201 of the character 1 so that the distance between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker 201 is within the first distance, the mobile phone 100 can receive the message 1 sent by the speaker 201 . The mobile phone 100 is not close to the speaker 202 ; therefore, the mobile phone 100 cannot receive the message 2 sent by the speaker 202 . As shown in FIG. 5 , after S508, the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S510.
S510、手机100接收到消息1,采用秘钥1加密配置信息1得到加密信息1。S510, the mobile phone 100 receives the message 1, and uses the secret key 1 to encrypt the configuration information 1 to obtain the encrypted information 1.
其中,加密信息1是第一加密信息。消息1中包括音箱201的ID 1和秘钥1。手机100接收到消息1之后,可以确定ID 1是上述角色1的音箱的标识。手机100可以保存表2所示的角色与ID的对应关系。The encrypted information 1 is the first encrypted information. Message 1 includes ID 1 and secret key 1 of speaker 201. After the mobile phone 100 receives the message 1, it can be determined that the ID 1 is the identifier of the speaker of the above-mentioned role 1. The mobile phone 100 may store the correspondence between roles and IDs shown in Table 2.
表2Table 2
角色 Role IDID
角色1role 1 ID 1 ID 1
可以理解,根据表2所示的角色与ID的对应关系,手机100可以确定角色1对应的音箱的ID。It can be understood that, according to the correspondence between roles and IDs shown in Table 2, the mobile phone 100 can determine the ID of the speaker corresponding to role 1.
其中,上述配置信息1还可以包括角色指示信息1,该角色指示信息1用于指示音箱201被配置为角色1(如左前置声道)。其中,配置信息1是第一配置信息。角色指示信息1是第一指示信息。The above configuration information 1 may further include role indication information 1, and the role indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is configured as the role 1 (eg, the left front channel). The configuration information 1 is the first configuration information. The role indication information 1 is the first indication information.
上述配置信息1可以包括配网信息1。该配网信息1是第一配网信息。该配网信息1用于支持音箱201进行组合音箱中的数据交互。其中,配网信息1详细描述可以参考以下实施例中的相关内容,此处不予赘述。The above configuration information 1 may include network distribution information 1 . The distribution network information 1 is the first distribution network information. The distribution network information 1 is used to support the speaker 201 to perform data interaction in the combined speaker. For the detailed description of the distribution network information 1, reference may be made to the relevant content in the following embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
S511、手机100向音箱201发送加密信息1。S511 , the mobile phone 100 sends the encrypted information 1 to the speaker 201 .
例如,手机100可以根据音箱201的ID 1向音箱201发送加密信息1。或者,手机100可以广播包括上述加密信息1的WiFi消息。其中,上述秘钥1是音箱201随机生成的,只有手机100通过消息1得到上述秘钥1;其他设备无法获知该秘钥1。因此,即使其他设备接收到包括上述加密信息1的WiFi消息,也无法解密该加密信息1,进而无法得到上述配置信息1。For example, the mobile phone 100 can send encrypted information 1 to the speaker 201 according to the ID 1 of the speaker 201 . Alternatively, the mobile phone 100 may broadcast a WiFi message including the above-mentioned encrypted information 1 . The above-mentioned key 1 is randomly generated by the speaker 201, and only the mobile phone 100 obtains the above-mentioned key 1 through the message 1; other devices cannot obtain the above-mentioned key 1. Therefore, even if other devices receive the WiFi message including the above-mentioned encrypted information 1, they cannot decrypt the encrypted information 1, and thus cannot obtain the above-mentioned configuration information 1.
S512、音箱201接收来自手机100的加密信息1,采用秘钥1解密加密信息1得到配置信息1。S512 , the speaker 201 receives the encrypted information 1 from the mobile phone 100 , and uses the secret key 1 to decrypt the encrypted information 1 to obtain the configuration information 1 .
S513、音箱201发出提示信息1。该提示信息1用于指示音箱201被配置为配置信息1所指示的角色1。S513, the speaker 201 sends a prompt message 1. The prompt information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is configured as the character 1 indicated by the configuration information 1 .
例如,音箱201可以发出图10A所示的提示信息1,如“左前置声道”1001。或者,音箱201可以显示上述角色1对应的光带,通过该光带发出提示信息1。例如,音箱201可以显示图10B所示的提示信息1003。又例如,上述提示信息1可以是语音信息。音箱201可以发出语音提示,如“音箱被配置为左前置声道”。又例如,上述提示信息1还可以为“已配置声道”、“声道已配置”或“角色已配置”的信息,本申请实施例对此不作限制。For example, the speaker 201 can send out the prompt message 1 shown in FIG. 10A , such as “left front channel” 1001 . Alternatively, the speaker 201 may display the light strip corresponding to the above-mentioned character 1, and send out the prompt message 1 through the light strip. For example, the speaker 201 can display the prompt information 1003 shown in FIG. 10B . For another example, the above-mentioned prompt information 1 may be voice information. The speaker 201 can issue a voice prompt, such as "the speaker is configured as the left front channel". For another example, the above-mentioned prompt information 1 may also be information of "channel has been configured", "channel has been configured", or "role has been configured", which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
S514、音箱201使用配置信息1中的配网信息1,与参与组合的其他音箱交互。S514 , the speaker 201 uses the distribution network information 1 in the configuration information 1 to interact with other speakers participating in the combination.
需要说明的是,上述配网信息可以有两种不同的实现方式。在不同的实现方式中,配网信息的具体内容不同,音箱201使用配网信息与参与组合的其他音箱交互方式不同。其中,S514的详细描述可以参考以下实施例中的相关内容,此处不予赘述。It should be noted that, the above-mentioned distribution network information may be implemented in two different ways. In different implementations, the specific content of the distribution network information is different, and the speaker 201 uses the distribution network information to interact with other speakers participating in the combination in different ways. For the detailed description of S514, reference may be made to the relevant content in the following embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,音箱201执行S508之后,可以继续使用弱天线接收来自手机100的加密信息1。在该实施例中,音箱202执行S509之后,可以继续使用弱天线接收来自手机100的信息(如加密信息2)。In some embodiments, after the speaker 201 performs S508, the weak antenna can continue to receive the encrypted information 1 from the mobile phone 100. In this embodiment, after the speaker 202 executes S509, it can continue to use the weak antenna to receive information (eg, encrypted information 2) from the mobile phone 100.
在另一些实施例中,音箱(如音箱201和音箱202)在发送短距消息之后,可以由弱天线使用强天线。例如,如图5所示,音箱201在发送消息1之后,可以执行S508a,由弱天线使用强天线;音箱202在发送消息2之后,可以执行S509a,由弱天线使用强天线。音箱201可以使用强天线接收来自手机100的加密信息1。In other embodiments, speakers (eg, speakers 201 and 202 ) may use a strong antenna instead of a weak antenna after sending short-range messages. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 , after the speaker 201 sends message 1, it can perform S508a, and the weak antenna uses the strong antenna; after the speaker 202 sends the message 2, it can perform S509a, and the weak antenna uses the strong antenna. The speaker 201 can receive the encrypted information 1 from the mobile phone 100 using a strong antenna.
例如,音箱在接收到手机100广播的NAN发布消息后,可以周期性的使用弱天线和强天线,直至接收到来自手机100的加密信息则不再使用弱天线。本申请实施例这里结合图11,介绍本申请实施例中音箱使用弱天线和强天线的原理。For example, after receiving the NAN release message broadcasted by the mobile phone 100 , the speaker can periodically use the weak antenna and the strong antenna, until the encrypted information from the mobile phone 100 is received, the weak antenna is no longer used. In this embodiment of the present application, with reference to FIG. 11 , the principle of using a weak antenna and a strong antenna for a sound box in an embodiment of the present application is introduced.
如图11所示,音箱300订阅NAN服务后,如果接收到来自手机100的NAN发布消息,则可以使用弱天线,并使用弱天线广播消息a。该消息a中包括音箱300的ID和秘钥a。在预设时长T1之后,音箱300可以由弱天线切换为强天线,即使用强天线。在预设时长T2之后,音箱300可以由强天线切换为弱天线(即使用弱天线),并使用弱天线广播消息b。该消息b中包括音箱300的ID和秘钥b。在预设时长T1之后,音箱300可以由弱天线切换为强天线,即使用强天线。直至音箱300接收到来自手机100的加密信息,音箱300则不会再使用弱天线,即无需再使用弱天线广播短距消息。As shown in FIG. 11 , after the speaker 300 subscribes to the NAN service, if it receives a NAN release message from the mobile phone 100, it can use a weak antenna, and use the weak antenna to broadcast message a. The message a includes the ID of the speaker 300 and the secret key a. After the preset time period T1, the speaker 300 can be switched from a weak antenna to a strong antenna, that is, a strong antenna is used. After the preset time period T2, the speaker 300 can be switched from a strong antenna to a weak antenna (ie, a weak antenna is used), and the weak antenna is used to broadcast the message b. The message b includes the ID of the speaker 300 and the secret key b. After the preset time period T1, the speaker 300 can be switched from a weak antenna to a strong antenna, that is, a strong antenna is used. Until the speaker 300 receives the encrypted information from the mobile phone 100, the speaker 300 will no longer use the weak antenna, that is, it is no longer necessary to use the weak antenna to broadcast short-range messages.
需要说明的是,上述预设时长T1与预设时长T2可以相同,也可以不同。音箱300在预设时长T1内使用弱天线可以广播一个或多个短距消息。在同一个预设时长T1内,音箱300所广播的短距消息中包括的秘钥可以相同。但是,不同预设时长T1内,音箱300所广播的短距消息中包括的秘钥不同。例如,上述秘钥a和秘钥b都是音箱300随机生成的秘钥,秘钥a和秘钥b不同。It should be noted that, the above-mentioned preset duration T1 and preset duration T2 may be the same or different. The speaker 300 can broadcast one or more short-range messages within the preset time period T1 using a weak antenna. Within the same preset duration T1, the secret keys included in the short-range messages broadcast by the speaker 300 may be the same. However, in different preset time lengths T1, the secret keys included in the short-range messages broadcast by the speaker 300 are different. For example, the above-mentioned secret key a and secret key b are both secret keys randomly generated by the speaker 300, and secret key a and secret key b are different.
图11所示的音箱300可以是图8所示的音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205中的任一音箱。也就是说,音箱201、音箱202、音箱203、音箱204和音箱205都可以按照图11所示的方式,进行弱天线和强天线的切换,直至接收到来自手机100的加密信息。The sound box 300 shown in FIG. 11 may be any sound box among the sound box 201 , the sound box 202 , the sound box 203 , the sound box 204 and the sound box 205 shown in FIG. 8 . That is to say, the speaker 201 , the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 and the speaker 205 can switch between the weak antenna and the strong antenna as shown in FIG. 11 until the encrypted information from the mobile phone 100 is received.
例如,如图5所示,音箱202执行S507使用弱天线,并执行S509使用弱天线广播短距消息2之后,由于手机100并未靠近音箱202;因此,手机100并不能接收到音箱202发送的短距消息2,从而不能向音箱202回复加密信息。S509a之后,音箱202则可以执行S515-S516。For example, as shown in FIG. 5 , after the speaker 202 executes S507 to use a weak antenna, and executes S509 to broadcast the short-range message 2 using the weak antenna, because the mobile phone 100 is not close to the speaker 202 ; therefore, the mobile phone 100 cannot receive the information sent by the speaker 202 . Short-range message 2, so the encrypted message cannot be returned to the speaker 202. After S509a, the speaker 202 can execute S515-S516.
S515、音箱202使用弱天线。S515, the speaker 202 uses a weak antenna.
其中,S509a和S515是可选的。Among them, S509a and S515 are optional.
S516、音箱202使用弱天线广播消息3。该消息3中包括音箱202的ID 2和秘钥3。S516, the speaker 202 broadcasts the message 3 by using the weak antenna. The message 3 includes the ID 2 and the secret key 3 of the speaker 202.
其中,音箱202的ID 2用于标识音箱202。上述秘钥3可以是音箱202随机生成 的秘钥。上述秘钥3与秘钥2不同。The ID 2 of the speaker 202 is used to identify the speaker 202. The above-mentioned secret key 3 may be a secret key randomly generated by the speaker 202. The above key 3 is different from the key 2.
可以理解,音箱202使用弱天线进行无线通信的有效传输距离为第一距离(如0.3米)。只有当其他设备(如手机100)与音箱之间的距离小于第一距离,才可以接收到音箱202发送的短距消息。而其他与音箱202之间距离大于第一距离的设备,则不能接收到音箱202发送的短距消息。这样的超短距离通信,可以保证音箱发送的短距消息不被其他设备接收到,可以避免由于其他设备获取到音箱的秘钥与音箱交互从而操作音箱,可以保证手机100与音箱202之间数据传输的安全性。It can be understood that the effective transmission distance of the speaker 202 using the weak antenna for wireless communication is the first distance (eg, 0.3 meters). Only when the distance between other devices (such as the mobile phone 100 ) and the speaker is less than the first distance, the short-range message sent by the speaker 202 can be received. And other devices whose distance from the speaker 202 is greater than the first distance cannot receive the short-range message sent by the speaker 202 . Such ultra-short-distance communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's key to interact with the speaker, and can ensure the data between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker 202. Transmission security.
在一些实施例中,手机100向音箱201发送加密信息1之后,便可以对参与组合的另一个音箱(如音箱202)进行配置。例如,如图5所示,在S511之后,手机100可以执行S517-S519对音箱202进行配置。In some embodiments, after the mobile phone 100 sends the encrypted information 1 to the speaker 201, another speaker (eg, the speaker 202) participating in the combination can be configured. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 , after S511 , the mobile phone 100 may perform S517 - S519 to configure the speaker 202 .
S517、手机100显示第四界面。该第四界面用于提示用户将手机100靠近角色2的音箱,使手机100与角色2的音箱之间的距离在第一距离内。S517. The mobile phone 100 displays a fourth interface. The fourth interface is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 2, so that the distance between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker of the character 2 is within the first distance.
例如,角色2是第二角色。手机100可以显示图12所示的第四界面1201。该第四界面1201用于提示用户将手机100靠近角色2(如右前置声道)的音箱。例如,该第四界面1201包括第三提示信息1202,如“请将手机靠近角色为右前置声道的音箱”。其中,角色2可以为上述N个音箱中任一个音箱的角色。例如,在图12所示的第四界面1201,角色2为右前置声道,该角色2的音箱是图8所示的音箱202。For example, character 2 is the second character. The mobile phone 100 can display the fourth interface 1201 shown in FIG. 12 . The fourth interface 1201 is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 2 (eg, the right front channel). For example, the fourth interface 1201 includes third prompt information 1202, such as "please move the mobile phone close to the speaker whose role is the right front channel". The role 2 may be the role of any one of the above N speakers. For example, in the fourth interface 1201 shown in FIG. 12 , the character 2 is the right front channel, and the speaker of the character 2 is the speaker 202 shown in FIG. 8 .
在S517之后,用户将手机100靠近角色2的音箱(如音箱202)。用户将手机100靠近角色2的音箱202,使手机100与音箱202之间的距离在第一距离内之后,手机100便可以接收到音箱202发送的消息3。如图5所示,在S516和S517之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S518。After S517, the user brings the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of character 2 (eg, the speaker 202). After the user places the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker 202 of the character 2 so that the distance between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker 202 is within the first distance, the mobile phone 100 can receive the message 3 sent by the speaker 202 . As shown in FIG. 5 , after S516 and S517 , the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S518 .
S518、手机100接收到消息3,采用秘钥2加密配置信息2得到加密信息2。S518, the mobile phone 100 receives the message 3, and uses the secret key 2 to encrypt the configuration information 2 to obtain the encrypted information 2.
其中,该加密信息2是第二加密信息。该消息3是第二消息或者第三消息。短距3中包括音箱202的ID 2和秘钥3。音箱202是第二音箱。ID 2是第二音箱的标识。秘钥3是第二秘钥或者第三秘钥。手机100接收到短距3之后,可以确定ID 2是上述角色2的音箱的标识。手机100可以保存表3所示的角色与ID的对应关系。The encrypted information 2 is the second encrypted information. This message 3 is the second message or the third message. The short distance 3 includes the ID 2 and the secret key 3 of the speaker 202 . The speaker 202 is the second speaker. ID 2 is the identification of the second speaker. Key 3 is the second key or the third key. After the mobile phone 100 receives the short distance 3, it can be determined that the ID 2 is the identifier of the speaker of the above-mentioned character 2. The mobile phone 100 can store the correspondence between roles and IDs shown in Table 3.
表3table 3
角色 Role IDID
角色1role 1 ID 1 ID 1
角色2role 2 ID 2ID 2
可以理解,根据表3所示的角色与ID的对应关系,手机100可以确定角色2对应的音箱的ID。It can be understood that, according to the correspondence between roles and IDs shown in Table 3, the mobile phone 100 can determine the ID of the speaker corresponding to role 2.
其中,上述配置信息2还可以包括角色指示信息2,该角色指示信息2用于指示音箱202被配置为角色2(如右前置声道)。配置信息2是第二配置信息。角色指示信息2是第二指示信息。The above-mentioned configuration information 2 may further include role indication information 2, and the role indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is configured as the role 2 (eg, the right front channel). The configuration information 2 is the second configuration information. The character instruction information 2 is the second instruction information.
上述配置信息2可以包括配网信息2。该配网信息2是第二配网信息。该配网信息2用于支持音箱201进行组合音箱中的数据交互。其中,配网信息2详细描述可以参考以下实施例中的相关内容,此处不予赘述。The above configuration information 2 may include network distribution information 2 . The distribution network information 2 is the second distribution network information. The distribution network information 2 is used to support the speaker 201 to perform data interaction in the combined speaker. For the detailed description of the distribution network information 2, reference may be made to the relevant content in the following embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
S519、手机100向音箱202发送加密信息2。S519 , the mobile phone 100 sends the encrypted information 2 to the speaker 202 .
例如,手机100可以根据音箱202的ID 2向音箱202发送加密信息2。或者,手机100可以广播包括上述加密信息2的WiFi消息。其中,上述秘钥3是音箱202随机生成的,只有手机100通过短距3得到上述秘钥3;其他设备无法获知该秘钥3。因此,即使其他设备接收到包括上述加密信息2的WiFi消息,也无法解密该加密信息2,进而无法得到上述配置信息2。For example, the mobile phone 100 can send encrypted information 2 to the speaker 202 according to the ID 2 of the speaker 202 . Alternatively, the mobile phone 100 may broadcast a WiFi message including the above-mentioned encrypted information 2 . The above-mentioned key 3 is randomly generated by the speaker 202, and only the mobile phone 100 obtains the above-mentioned key 3 through the short distance 3; other devices cannot obtain the above-mentioned key 3. Therefore, even if other devices receive the WiFi message including the above-mentioned encrypted information 2, they cannot decrypt the encrypted information 2, and thus cannot obtain the above-mentioned configuration information 2.
S520、音箱202接收来自手机100的加密信息2,采用秘钥3解密加密信息2得到配置信息2。S520 , the speaker 202 receives the encrypted information 2 from the mobile phone 100 , and uses the secret key 3 to decrypt the encrypted information 2 to obtain the configuration information 2 .
S521、音箱202发出提示信息2。该提示信息2用于指示音箱202被配置为配置信息2所指示的角色2。S521 , the speaker 202 sends a prompt message 2 . The prompt information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is configured as the role 2 indicated by the configuration information 2 .
例如,音箱202可以显示上述角色2对应的光带,通过该光带发出提示信息2。例如,音箱201可以显示图13所示的提示信息1301。For example, the sound box 202 can display the light strip corresponding to the above-mentioned character 2, and send out the prompt message 2 through the light strip. For example, the speaker 201 can display the prompt information 1301 shown in FIG. 13 .
又例如,上述提示信息2可以是语音信息。音箱202可以发出语音提示,如“音箱被配置为右前置声道”。For another example, the above-mentioned prompt information 2 may be voice information. The speaker 202 can issue a voice prompt, such as "the speaker is configured as the right front channel".
S522、音箱202使用配置信息2中的配网信息2,与参与组合的其他音箱交互。S522 , the speaker 202 uses the distribution network information 2 in the configuration information 2 to interact with other speakers participating in the combination.
需要说明的是,上述配网信息可以有两种不同的实现方式。在不同的实现方式中,配网信息的具体内容不同,音箱202使用配网信息与参与组合的其他音箱交互方式不同。其中,S522的详细描述可以参考以下实施例中的相关内容,此处不予赘述。It should be noted that, the above-mentioned distribution network information may be implemented in two different ways. In different implementations, the specific content of the distribution network information is different, and the speaker 202 uses the distribution network information to interact with other speakers participating in the combination in different ways. For the detailed description of S522, reference may be made to the relevant content in the following embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
如图5所示,在S518之后,手机100可以执行S523,配置音箱203、音箱204和音箱205。其中,S523中配置音箱203、音箱204和音箱205的具体方法,可以参考上述实施例中,配置音箱201和音箱202的方法,此处不予赘述。As shown in FIG. 5 , after S518 , the mobile phone 100 may execute S523 to configure the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 and the speaker 205 . The specific method for configuring the sound box 203, the sound box 204, and the sound box 205 in S523 may refer to the method for configuring the sound box 201 and the sound box 202 in the above-mentioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
示例性的,假设音箱203的ID为ID 3,音箱204的ID为ID 4,音箱205的ID为ID 5。手机100可以保存表4所示的角色与ID的对应关系。Exemplarily, it is assumed that the ID of the speaker 203 is ID 3, the ID of the speaker 204 is ID 4, and the ID of the speaker 205 is ID 5. The mobile phone 100 can store the correspondence between roles and IDs shown in Table 4.
表4Table 4
角色Role IDID
角色1(如左前置声道)Role 1 (eg left front channel) ID 1 ID 1
角色2(如右前置声道)Role 2 (eg right front channel) ID 2ID 2
角色3(如中置声道)Character 3 (eg center channel) ID 3ID 3
角色4(如左环绕声道)Character 4 (as left surround channel) ID 4ID 4
角色5(如右环绕声道)Character 5 (eg right surround channel) ID 5ID 5
本申请实施例中,手机100可以通过界面(如第二界面)向用户指示N个音箱的摆放布局,使得用户可以按照第二界面指示的摆放布局摆放N个音箱。其中,音箱的摆放位置可以决定该音箱在组合音箱中的角色。音箱的摆放位置不同,该音箱在参与组合的N个音箱中的角色则不同。手机100可以按照N个音箱的摆放位置,为各个音箱分配角色。这样,可以提升组合音箱的播放效果。In this embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone 100 may indicate the placement layout of the N speakers to the user through an interface (eg, the second interface), so that the user may place the N speakers according to the placement layout indicated by the second interface. Among them, the placement of the speaker can determine the role of the speaker in the combined speaker. The placement of the speakers is different, and the roles of the speakers in the N speakers participating in the combination are different. The mobile phone 100 may assign roles to each speaker according to the placement positions of the N speakers. In this way, the playback effect of the combined speakers can be improved.
并且,手机100可以在界面上标注位于不同位置的音箱的角色。然后,手机100可以通过界面(如第三界面或第四界面)依次指示用户将手机100靠近每个角色的音箱。可以理解,当在用户将N个音箱按照手机100的指示摆放后,该N个音箱的摆放布局与手机100上参与组合的N个音箱的摆放布局相同。因此,当手机100指示用户将手机100靠近一个角色的音箱时,手机100可以根据该角色的音箱的图标在界面上 的位置,准确的找到该角色对应的音箱。Moreover, the mobile phone 100 can mark the roles of speakers located at different positions on the interface. Then, the mobile phone 100 may sequentially instruct the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of each character through an interface (eg, the third interface or the fourth interface). It can be understood that after the user places the N speakers according to the instructions of the mobile phone 100 , the placement layout of the N speakers is the same as the placement layout of the N speakers participating in the combination on the mobile phone 100 . Therefore, when the mobile phone 100 instructs the user to move the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of a character, the mobile phone 100 can accurately find the speaker corresponding to the character according to the position of the icon of the speaker of the character on the interface.
综上所述,本申请实施例的方法中,手机100可以以直观的方式支持用户设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色。这样,便可以解决由于用户难以区分各个音箱而导致角色设置错误的问题,可以提升角色设置的准确率。并且,准确设置参与组合的各个音箱的角色,可以提升组合音箱的音频播放效果。To sum up, in the method of the embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone 100 can support the user to set the roles of each speaker participating in the combination in an intuitive manner. In this way, it is possible to solve the problem of incorrect character setting due to the difficulty for the user to distinguish each speaker, and to improve the accuracy of character setting. Moreover, accurately setting the roles of each speaker participating in the combination can improve the audio playback effect of the combined speakers.
进一步的,音箱(如音箱201)使用弱天线广播包括该音箱的ID和秘钥的短距消息。这样的超短距离通信,可以保证音箱发送的短距消息不被其他设备接收到,可以避免由于其他设备获取到音箱的秘钥与音箱交互从而操作音箱,可以保证手机100与音箱之间数据传输的安全性。并且,通过手机100靠近(如触碰)音箱的方式实现方式短距消息的传输,便于用户操作,可以提升用户的操作体验。Further, a speaker (eg, speaker 201 ) uses a weak antenna to broadcast a short-range message including the speaker's ID and secret key. Such ultra-short-range communication can ensure that the short-range messages sent by the speaker are not received by other devices, and can avoid operating the speaker because other devices obtain the speaker's secret key and interact with the speaker, and can ensure data transmission between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker. security. In addition, the short-distance message transmission is realized by the mobile phone 100 approaching (eg, touching) the speaker, which is convenient for the user to operate, and can improve the user's operating experience.
在另一些实施例中,手机100可以在确认音箱201配置成功后,才可以对参与组合的另一个音箱(如音箱202)进行配置。例如,如图14所示,在S517-S518之前,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S1401-S1402;在S523之前,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S1403-S1404。In other embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may configure another speaker (eg, the speaker 202 ) participating in the combination after confirming that the speaker 201 is successfully configured. For example, as shown in FIG. 14 , before S517-S518, the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S1401-S1402; before S523, the method of this embodiment of the present application may further include S1403-S1404.
S1401、音箱201向手机100发送确认消息1。S1401 , the speaker 201 sends a confirmation message 1 to the mobile phone 100 .
其中,该确认消息1是第一确认消息。该确认消息1用于指示音箱201配置成功。在一种实现方式中,音箱201可以在接收到来自手机100的加密信息1之后,执行S1401向手机100发送确认消息1。例如,如图14所示,音箱201可以在执行S513发出提示信息1之后,执行S1101向手机100发送确认消息1。Wherein, the confirmation message 1 is the first confirmation message. The confirmation message 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is successfully configured. In an implementation manner, after receiving the encrypted message 1 from the mobile phone 100 , the speaker 201 may execute S1401 to send the confirmation message 1 to the mobile phone 100 . For example, as shown in FIG. 14 , after executing S513 to send the prompt message 1, the speaker 201 can execute S1101 to send the confirmation message 1 to the mobile phone 100 .
在另一种实现方式中,音箱201发出提示信息1之后,可以接收用户对音箱201的操作c。该操作c用于确认音箱配置完成。例如,该操作c可以是用户对图10A所示的“确定”按钮1002或图10B所示的“确定”按钮1004的点击操作。响应于用户对音箱201的操作c,音箱201可以向手机100发送确认消息1。In another implementation manner, after the sound box 201 sends out the prompt information 1, the user's operation c on the sound box 201 can be received. This operation c is used to confirm that the speaker configuration is complete. For example, the operation c may be a click operation of the user on the “OK” button 1002 shown in FIG. 10A or the “OK” button 1004 shown in FIG. 10B . In response to the user's operation c on the speaker 201 , the speaker 201 may send a confirmation message 1 to the mobile phone 100 .
S1402、手机100接收确认消息1。S1402 , the mobile phone 100 receives the confirmation message 1 .
在该实施例中,手机100接收到确认消息1后,可以确定音箱201配置成功。此时,手机100则可以执行S517-S518。也就是说,响应于手机100接收到该确认消息1,手机100可以执行S517-S518。In this embodiment, after the mobile phone 100 receives the confirmation message 1, it can be determined that the configuration of the speaker 201 is successful. At this time, the mobile phone 100 can execute S517-S518. That is, in response to the mobile phone 100 receiving the confirmation message 1, the mobile phone 100 may perform S517-S518.
S1403、音箱202向手机100发送确认消息2。S1403 , the speaker 202 sends a confirmation message 2 to the mobile phone 100 .
其中,该确认消息2是第二确认消息。该确认消息2用于指示音箱202配置成功。在一种实现方式中,音箱202可以在接收到来自手机100的加密信息2之后,执行S1403向手机100发送确认消息2。例如,如图14所示,音箱202可以在执行S521发出提示信息2之后,执行S1403向手机100发送确认消息2。Wherein, the confirmation message 2 is the second confirmation message. The confirmation message 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is successfully configured. In an implementation manner, after receiving the encrypted information 2 from the mobile phone 100 , the speaker 202 may execute S1403 to send the confirmation message 2 to the mobile phone 100 . For example, as shown in FIG. 14 , the speaker 202 may execute S1403 to send the confirmation message 2 to the mobile phone 100 after executing S521 to send the prompt message 2 .
在另一种实现方式中,音箱202发出提示信息2之后,可以接收用户对音箱202的操作c。该操作c用于确认音箱配置完成。例如,该操作c可以是用户对图13所示的“确定”按钮1302的点击操作。响应于用户对音箱202的操作c,音箱202可以向手机100发送确认消息2。In another implementation manner, after the speaker 202 sends out the prompt information 2, the user's operation c on the speaker 202 can be received. This operation c is used to confirm that the speaker configuration is complete. For example, the operation c may be a click operation of the user on the “OK” button 1302 shown in FIG. 13 . In response to the user's operation c on the speaker 202 , the speaker 202 may send a confirmation message 2 to the mobile phone 100 .
S1404、手机100接收确认消息2。S1404 , the mobile phone 100 receives the confirmation message 2 .
在该实施例中,手机100接收到确认消息2后,可以确定音箱202配置成功。此时,手机100则可以执行S523。也就是说,响应于手机100接收到该确认消息2,手 机100可以执行S523。In this embodiment, after the mobile phone 100 receives the confirmation message 2, it can be determined that the configuration of the speaker 202 is successful. At this time, the mobile phone 100 may execute S523. That is, in response to the mobile phone 100 receiving the confirmation message 2, the mobile phone 100 may perform S523.
可以理解,如果用户对音箱输入操作c,则表示该用户确定该音箱配置正确。增加用户确认的流程,可以进一步提升组合音箱中各个音箱的角色配置的准确性。It can be understood that if the user inputs operation c to the speaker, it means that the user determines that the speaker is configured correctly. Adding the user confirmation process can further improve the accuracy of the role configuration of each speaker in the combined speaker.
本申请实施例这里介绍上述配置信息中的配网信息,如配置信息1和配置信息2。This embodiment of the present application introduces the network distribution information in the above configuration information, such as configuration information 1 and configuration information 2 .
在第一种应用场景中,上述N个音箱以主音箱作为接入点(access point,AP)的AP模式构成组合音箱。例如,图15所示的音箱201是N个音箱中的主音箱,其他音箱作为从音箱。In the first application scenario, the above N speakers form a combined speaker in an AP mode in which the main speaker is used as an access point (access point, AP). For example, the speaker 201 shown in FIG. 15 is the master speaker among the N speakers, and the other speakers are slave speakers.
在第一种应用场景下,手机100向音箱201(主音箱)发送的配置信息1(即第一配置信息)可以包括:角色指示信息1(即第一指示信息)、身份指示信息1(即第二身份信息)和配网信息1(即第一配网信息)。In the first application scenario, the configuration information 1 (that is, the first configuration information) sent by the mobile phone 100 to the speaker 201 (the main speaker) may include: role indication information 1 (that is, the first indication information), identity indication information 1 (that is, the first indication information) second identity information) and distribution network information 1 (ie, the first distribution network information).
其中,上述角色指示信息1用于指示音箱201被配置为角色1(如左前置声道)。上述身份指示信息1用于指示音箱201为主音箱。The above-mentioned role indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is configured as the role 1 (eg, the left front channel). The above-mentioned identity indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is the main speaker.
上述配网信息1可以包括:主音箱(如音箱201)作为AP的第一SSID和第一接入密码。在一种实现方式中,该第一SSID和第一接入密码可以是手机100随机生成的。在另一种实现方式中,该第一SSID和第一接入密码可以是音箱201随机生成或者预先配置的。在这种实现方式中,手机100可以接收来自音箱201的第一SSID和第一接入密码。例如,该第一SSID和第一接入密码可以携带在上述短距消息1中。The above-mentioned network distribution information 1 may include: the main speaker (eg, the speaker 201 ) as the first SSID and the first access password of the AP. In an implementation manner, the first SSID and the first access password may be randomly generated by the mobile phone 100 . In another implementation manner, the first SSID and the first access password may be randomly generated or preconfigured by the speaker 201 . In this implementation manner, the mobile phone 100 can receive the first SSID and the first access password from the speaker 201 . For example, the first SSID and the first access password may be carried in the above-mentioned short-range message 1.
在这种应用场景中,音箱201接收到上述配置信息1之后,可以根据该配置信息1中的身份指示信息1确定该音箱201是主音箱。然后,音箱201便可以作为接入点产生第一无线局域网。该第一无线局域网的SSID为上述第一SSID,该第一无线局域网的接入密码为上述第一接入密码。In this application scenario, after the speaker 201 receives the above configuration information 1, it can be determined that the speaker 201 is the main speaker according to the identity indication information 1 in the configuration information 1. Then, the speaker 201 can act as an access point to generate the first wireless local area network. The SSID of the first wireless local area network is the above-mentioned first SSID, and the access password of the first wireless local area network is the above-mentioned first access password.
在第一种应用场景下,手机100向音箱202(从音箱)发送的配置信息2(即第二配置信息)可以包括:角色指示信息2(即第二指示信息)、身份指示信息2(即第一身份信息)和配网信息2(即第二配网信息)。In the first application scenario, the configuration information 2 (that is, the second configuration information) sent by the mobile phone 100 to the speaker 202 (from the speaker) may include: role indication information 2 (that is, the second indication information), identity indication information 2 (that is, the second instruction information) first identity information) and distribution network information 2 (ie, second distribution network information).
其中,上述角色指示信息2用于指示音箱202被配置为角色2(如右前置声道)。上述身份指示信息2用于指示音箱202为从音箱。上述配网信息2可以包括:从音箱(如音箱202)待接入的AP的第一SSID和第一接入密码。The above-mentioned role indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is configured as the role 2 (eg, the right front channel). The above-mentioned identity indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is a slave speaker. The above-mentioned network distribution information 2 may include: the first SSID and the first access password of the AP to be accessed from the speaker (eg, the speaker 202 ).
在这种应用场景中,音箱202接收到上述配置信息2之后,可以根据该配置信息2中的身份指示信息2确定该音箱202是从音箱。然后,音箱202便可以根据第一SSID和第一接入密码接入上述第一无线局域网。In this application scenario, after the speaker 202 receives the above configuration information 2, it can be determined that the speaker 202 is a slave speaker according to the identity indication information 2 in the configuration information 2. Then, the speaker 202 can access the above-mentioned first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password.
需要说明的是,在从音箱(如音箱202、音箱203、音箱204或音箱205)均接入音箱201作为接入点产生的第一无线局域网之后,便可以完成上述组合音箱的构建。It should be noted that after the first wireless local area network generated by the speaker 201 as the access point is connected from the speakers (such as the speaker 202, the speaker 203, the speaker 204 or the speaker 205), the construction of the above-mentioned combined speaker can be completed.
在第一种应用场景中,主音箱(如音箱201)还可以接入网络以实现音箱与云设备的交互。手机100还可以向主音箱(如音箱201)发送图15所示的路由器1500的SSID(记为第二SSID)和接入密码(记为第二接入密码)。In the first application scenario, the main speaker (such as the speaker 201) can also be connected to the network to realize the interaction between the speaker and the cloud device. The mobile phone 100 may also send the SSID (denoted as the second SSID) and the access password (denoted as the second access password) of the router 1500 shown in FIG. 15 to the main speaker (eg, the speaker 201 ).
在一种实现方式中,上述配网信息1还可以包括第二SSID和第二接入密码。音箱201接收到上述配置信息1之后,可以根据该配置信息1中的身份指示信息1确定该音箱201是主音箱。然后,音箱201便可以根据第二SSID和第二接入密码接入路由器1500提供的第二无线局域网。In an implementation manner, the foregoing network configuration information 1 may further include a second SSID and a second access password. After the speaker 201 receives the above configuration information 1, it can be determined that the speaker 201 is the main speaker according to the identity indication information 1 in the configuration information 1. Then, the speaker 201 can access the second wireless local area network provided by the router 1500 according to the second SSID and the second access password.
在另一种实现方式中,上述配网信息1不包括第二SSID和第二接入密码。手机100可以采用上述秘钥1加密该第二SSID和第二接入密码,得到加密信息4;然后,向音箱201发送该加密信息4。音箱201收到该加密信息4之后,可以采用秘钥1解密该加密信息4,得到第二SSID和第二接入密码;然后,根据第二SSID和第二接入密码接入路由器1500提供的第二无线局域网。In another implementation manner, the foregoing network configuration information 1 does not include the second SSID and the second access password. The mobile phone 100 can encrypt the second SSID and the second access password using the above-mentioned secret key 1 to obtain encrypted information 4 ; then, send the encrypted information 4 to the speaker 201 . After the speaker 201 receives the encrypted information 4, it can use the secret key 1 to decrypt the encrypted information 4 to obtain the second SSID and the second access password; The second wireless local area network.
如图15所示,音箱201作为主音箱可以接入路由器1500提供的第二无线局域网,通过路由器1500与云设备交互。如图15所示,其他音箱(如音箱202、音箱203、音箱204或音箱205)作为从音箱可以接入音箱201提供的第一无线局域网。As shown in FIG. 15 , the speaker 201 can be connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router 1500 as the main speaker, and interact with the cloud device through the router 1500 . As shown in FIG. 15 , other speakers (eg, speaker 202 , speaker 203 , speaker 204 or speaker 205 ) can be connected to the first wireless local area network provided by speaker 201 as a slave speaker.
在第二种应用场景中,上述N个音箱以非AP模式构成组合音箱。例如,图16所示的音箱201是N个音箱中的主音箱,其他音箱作为从音箱。In the second application scenario, the above N speakers form a combined speaker in a non-AP mode. For example, the speaker 201 shown in FIG. 16 is the master speaker among the N speakers, and the other speakers are slave speakers.
在第二种应用场景下,手机100向音箱201(主音箱)发送的配置信息1可以包括:角色指示信息1、身份指示信息1和配网信息1。In the second application scenario, the configuration information 1 sent by the mobile phone 100 to the speaker 201 (main speaker) may include: role indication information 1 , identity indication information 1 and distribution network information 1 .
其中,上述角色指示信息1用于指示音箱201被配置为角色1(如左前置声道)。上述身份指示信息1用于指示音箱201为主音箱。上述配网信息1可以包括:路由器1500的SSID(记为第二SSID)和接入密码(记为第二接入密码)。音箱201接收到上述配置信息1之后,可以根据该配置信息1中的身份指示信息1确定该音箱201是主音箱。音箱201根据第二SSID和第二接入密码接入上述第二无线局域网。The above-mentioned role indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is configured as the role 1 (eg, the left front channel). The above-mentioned identity indication information 1 is used to indicate that the speaker 201 is the main speaker. The above-mentioned network distribution information 1 may include: the SSID of the router 1500 (denoted as the second SSID) and the access password (denoted as the second access password). After the speaker 201 receives the above configuration information 1, it can be determined that the speaker 201 is the main speaker according to the identity indication information 1 in the configuration information 1. The speaker 201 accesses the above-mentioned second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password.
在第二种应用场景下,手机100向音箱202(从音箱)发送的配置信息2可以包括:角色指示信息2、身份指示信息2和配网信息2。In the second application scenario, the configuration information 2 sent by the mobile phone 100 to the speaker 202 (from the speaker) may include: role indication information 2 , identity indication information 2 and distribution network information 2 .
其中,上述角色指示信息2用于指示音箱202被配置为角色2(如右前置声道)。上述身份指示信息2用于指示音箱202为从音箱。上述配网信息2可以包括:第二SSID和第二接入密码。音箱202接收到上述配置信息2之后,可以根据该配置信息2中的身份指示信息2确定该音箱202是从音箱。然后,音箱202便可以根据第二SSID和第二接入密码接入上述第二无线局域网。The above-mentioned role indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is configured as the role 2 (eg, the right front channel). The above-mentioned identity indication information 2 is used to indicate that the speaker 202 is a slave speaker. The foregoing network distribution information 2 may include: a second SSID and a second access password. After the speaker 202 receives the above configuration information 2, it can be determined that the speaker 202 is a slave speaker according to the identity indication information 2 in the configuration information 2. Then, the speaker 202 can access the above-mentioned second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password.
可以理解,在主音箱(如音箱201)和从音箱(如音箱202、音箱203、音箱204或音箱205)均接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网之后,便可以完成上述组合音箱的构建。例如,如图16所示,音箱201作为主音箱,音箱202、音箱203、音箱204或音箱205作为从音箱可以接入路由器1500提供的第二无线局域网。It can be understood that after both the main speaker (eg, speaker 201) and the slave speakers (eg, speaker 202, speaker 203, speaker 204, or speaker 205) are connected to the second wireless local area network provided by the router, the construction of the above-mentioned combined speaker can be completed. For example, as shown in FIG. 16 , the speaker 201 is used as the master speaker, and the speaker 202 , the speaker 203 , the speaker 204 or the speaker 205 as the slave speakers can access the second wireless local area network provided by the router 1500 .
需要说明的是,在第二种应用场景中,主音箱(如音箱201)与从音箱通过路由器1500进行数据传输。主音箱还可以通过路由器1500与云设备的交互。It should be noted that, in the second application scenario, the master speaker (eg, the speaker 201 ) and the slave speaker perform data transmission through the router 1500 . The main speaker can also interact with the cloud device through the router 1500.
在一些实施例中,上述N个音箱以AP模式或者非AP模式构成组合音箱是在音箱出厂前便预先配置好的。上述第一APP中也预先配置了手机100需要向音箱发送的配置信息的内容。In some embodiments, the above-mentioned N speakers form a combined speaker in an AP mode or a non-AP mode, which is pre-configured before the speaker leaves the factory. The above-mentioned first APP is also pre-configured with the content of the configuration information that the mobile phone 100 needs to send to the speaker.
在另一种实施例中,可以由用户选择上述N个音箱以AP模式或者非AP模式构成组合音箱。In another embodiment, the above-mentioned N speakers may be selected by the user to form a combined speaker in AP mode or non-AP mode.
在该实施例的一种实现方式中,响应于用户对第一界面的操作a,手机100可以显示第五界面。该第五界面用于提示用户选择上述N个音箱构成组合音箱的模式。例如,该N个音箱构成组合音箱的模式可以包括AP模式和非AP模式。In an implementation of this embodiment, in response to the user's operation a on the first interface, the mobile phone 100 may display a fifth interface. The fifth interface is used to prompt the user to select a mode in which the above-mentioned N speakers form a combined speaker. For example, the modes in which the N speakers form a combined speaker may include an AP mode and a non-AP mode.
例如,响应于用户对图7A所示的“立体声组合音箱”选项702或“环绕声组合音 箱”选项703的点击操作(如单击操作),手机100可以显示图17所示的第五界面1701。该第五界面1701包括“AP模式”选项1702和“非AP模式”选项1703。该第五界面1701还包括用于介绍上述AP模式和非AP模式的提示信息,如提示信息“在AP模式,主音箱作为热点,从音箱接入主音箱提供的无线局域网”1704和提示信息“在非AP模式,主音箱和从音箱均接入路由器提供的无线局域网”1705。For example, in response to the user's click operation (eg, a single-click operation) on the "stereo sound box" option 702 or the "surround sound box" option 703 shown in FIG. 7A , the mobile phone 100 may display the fifth interface 1701 shown in FIG. 17 . . The fifth interface 1701 includes an "AP Mode" option 1702 and a "Non-AP Mode" option 1703 . The fifth interface 1701 also includes prompt information for introducing the above AP mode and non-AP mode, such as prompt information "In AP mode, the main speaker is used as a hotspot, and the speaker is connected to the wireless LAN provided by the main speaker" 1704 and prompt information " In non-AP mode, both the main speaker and the slave speakers are connected to the wireless LAN provided by the router"1705.
响应于用户在第五界面对AP模式的选择操作,如用户对图17所示的“AP模式”选项1702的点击操作,手机100可以显示第二界面。然后,手机100在执行S510时,则可以采用秘钥1加密上述第一种应用场景中所述的配置信息1得到加密信息1。手机100在执行S518时,则可以采用秘钥3加密上述第一种应用场景中所述的配置信息2得到加密信息2。并且,音箱(如音箱201或音箱202)也可以按照上述第一种场景中所述的方式,与参与组合的其他音箱交互。In response to the user's selection operation on the AP mode on the fifth interface, such as the user's click operation on the "AP mode" option 1702 shown in FIG. 17 , the mobile phone 100 may display the second interface. Then, when the mobile phone 100 executes S510, the encrypted information 1 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 1 described in the first application scenario with the secret key 1. When the mobile phone 100 executes S518, the encrypted information 2 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 2 described in the first application scenario with the secret key 3. In addition, the sound box (such as the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 ) can also interact with other sound boxes participating in the combination in the manner described in the first scenario above.
响应于用户在第五界面对非AP模式的选择操作,如用户对图17所示的“AP模式”选项1702的点击操作,手机100可以显示第二界面。然后,手机100在执行S510时,则可以采用秘钥1加密上述第二种应用场景中所述的配置信息1得到加密信息1。手机100在执行S518时,则可以采用秘钥3加密上述第二种应用场景中所述的配置信息2得到加密信息2。并且,音箱(如音箱201或音箱202)也可以按照上述第二种场景中所述的方式,与参与组合的其他音箱交互。In response to the user's selection operation on the non-AP mode on the fifth interface, such as the user's click operation on the "AP mode" option 1702 shown in FIG. 17 , the mobile phone 100 may display the second interface. Then, when the mobile phone 100 executes S510, the encrypted information 1 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 1 described in the second application scenario above with the secret key 1. When the mobile phone 100 executes S518, the encrypted information 2 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 2 described in the second application scenario above with the secret key 3. In addition, the sound box (such as the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 ) can also interact with other sound boxes participating in the combination in the manner described in the second scenario above.
在该实施例的另一种实现方式中,响应于用户对第二界面的操作b,手机100可以显示第五界面。该第五界面用于提示用户选择上述N个音箱构成组合音箱的模式。例如,该N个音箱构成组合音箱的模式可以包括AP模式和非AP模式。In another implementation of this embodiment, in response to the user's operation b on the second interface, the mobile phone 100 may display the fifth interface. The fifth interface is used to prompt the user to select a mode in which the above-mentioned N speakers form a combined speaker. For example, the modes in which the N speakers form a combined speaker may include an AP mode and a non-AP mode.
例如,响应于用户对图7B或图7C所示的“开始配网”按钮706点击操作,手机100可以显示图17所示的第五界面1701。该第五界面1701包括“AP模式”选项1702和“非AP模式”选项1703。For example, in response to the user clicking the "start network configuration" button 706 shown in FIG. 7B or FIG. 7C , the mobile phone 100 may display the fifth interface 1701 shown in FIG. 17 . The fifth interface 1701 includes an "AP Mode" option 1702 and a "Non-AP Mode" option 1703 .
响应于用户在第五界面对AP模式的选择操作,如用户对图17所示的“AP模式”选项1702的点击操作,手机100可以显示第三界面。然后,手机100在执行S510时,则可以采用秘钥1加密上述第一种应用场景中所述的配置信息1得到加密信息1。手机100在执行S518时,则可以采用秘钥3加密上述第一种应用场景中所述的配置信息2得到加密信息2。并且,音箱(如音箱201或音箱202)也可以按照上述第一种场景中所述的方式,与参与组合的其他音箱交互。In response to the user's selection operation on the AP mode on the fifth interface, such as the user's click operation on the "AP mode" option 1702 shown in FIG. 17 , the mobile phone 100 may display a third interface. Then, when the mobile phone 100 executes S510, the encrypted information 1 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 1 described in the first application scenario with the secret key 1. When the mobile phone 100 executes S518, the encrypted information 2 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 2 described in the first application scenario with the secret key 3. In addition, the sound box (such as the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 ) can also interact with other sound boxes participating in the combination in the manner described in the first scenario above.
响应于用户在第五界面对非AP模式的选择操作,如用户对图17所示的“AP模式”选项1702的点击操作,手机100可以显示第三界面。然后,手机100在执行S510时,则可以采用秘钥1加密上述第二种应用场景中所述的配置信息1得到加密信息1。手机100在执行S518时,则可以采用秘钥3加密上述第二种应用场景中所述的配置信息2得到加密信息2。并且,音箱(如音箱201或音箱202)也可以按照上述第二种场景中所述的方式,与参与组合的其他音箱交互。In response to the user's selection operation on the non-AP mode on the fifth interface, such as the user's click operation on the "AP mode" option 1702 shown in FIG. 17 , the mobile phone 100 may display a third interface. Then, when the mobile phone 100 executes S510, the encrypted information 1 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 1 described in the second application scenario above with the secret key 1. When the mobile phone 100 executes S518, the encrypted information 2 can be obtained by encrypting the configuration information 2 described in the second application scenario above with the secret key 3. In addition, the sound box (such as the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 ) can also interact with other sound boxes participating in the combination in the manner described in the second scenario above.
本申请实施例中,可以由用户选择采用AP模式或者非AP模式构建组合音箱。这样,可以按照用户的喜好构建组合音箱,可以提升用户的使用体验。In the embodiment of the present application, the user may choose to construct the combined speaker in the AP mode or the non-AP mode. In this way, a combined speaker can be constructed according to the user's preference, which can improve the user's experience.
在一些实施例中,可以由手机100从上述N个音箱中随机选择出主音箱。例如,手机100可以选择左前置声道的音箱作为主音箱。In some embodiments, the main speaker may be randomly selected by the mobile phone 100 from the above N speakers. For example, the mobile phone 100 may select the speaker of the left front channel as the main speaker.
在另一些实施例中,上述N个音箱中主音箱的角色的固定的,可以预先配置在第一APP中。例如,针对立体声组合音箱而言,左声道的音箱可以是主音箱。又例如,针对环绕声的组合音箱而言,中置声道的音箱可以是主音箱。上述实施例中以左前置声道的音箱是主音箱为例。In other embodiments, the role of the main speaker among the above N speakers is fixed and may be pre-configured in the first APP. For example, for a stereo combination speaker, the speaker of the left channel can be the main speaker. For another example, for a surround sound combination speaker, the center channel speaker may be the main speaker. In the above embodiment, the speaker of the left front channel is the main speaker as an example.
在一些实施例中,为了保证主音箱与从音箱进行数据交互过程中的信息安全,手机100还可以向主音箱和从音箱发送组合音箱进行数据交互的音箱秘钥和凭证。In some embodiments, in order to ensure information security during the data interaction between the master speaker and the slave speaker, the mobile phone 100 may also send the speaker key and certificate for the combined speaker to perform data interaction to the master speaker and the slave speaker.
在一种实现方式中,上述配置信息1和配置信息2中还可以包括组合音箱进行数据交互的音箱秘钥和凭证。该音箱秘钥用于主音箱与从音箱加密彼此之间的交互的数据,该凭证用于表征音箱的身份,如该音箱是组合音箱中的成员。In an implementation manner, the above configuration information 1 and configuration information 2 may further include a speaker key and a certificate for combining speakers to perform data interaction. The speaker key is used to encrypt the interactive data between the master speaker and the slave speaker, and the certificate is used to represent the identity of the speaker, for example, the speaker is a member of the combined speaker.
在另一种实现方式中,手机100可以在向音箱(如音箱201)发送加密信息(如加密信息1)之后,或者接收到来自音箱(如音箱201)的确认消息(如确认消息1)之后,采用该音箱通过短距消息传输的秘钥(如秘钥1)加密上述音箱秘钥和凭证,然后再向该音箱(如音箱201)发送加密后的信息。音箱(如音箱201)接收到该加密后的信息后,可以解密该信息,得到上述音箱秘钥和凭证。In another implementation manner, the mobile phone 100 may send encrypted information (eg, encrypted information 1) to the speaker (eg, speaker 201 ), or after receiving a confirmation message (eg, confirmation message 1 ) from the speaker (eg, speaker 201 ) , encrypt the above-mentioned speaker key and certificate by using the key (such as key 1) transmitted by the speaker through the short-distance message, and then send the encrypted information to the speaker (such as the speaker 201). After the speaker (eg, speaker 201 ) receives the encrypted information, it can decrypt the information to obtain the speaker key and certificate.
在另一些实施例中,组合音箱中的主音箱和从音箱可以周期性的协商并更新上述音箱秘钥和凭证。这样,可以提升主音箱与从音箱进行数据交互过程中的信息安全。In other embodiments, the master speaker and the slave speaker in the combination speaker may periodically negotiate and update the speaker key and certificate. In this way, the information security in the process of data interaction between the master speaker and the slave speaker can be improved.
其中,在第一种应用场景中,主音箱和从音箱可以通过上述第一无线局域网协商并更新上述音箱秘钥和凭证。在第二种应用场景中,主音箱和从音箱可以通过上述第二无线局域网协商并更新上述音箱秘钥和凭证。Wherein, in the first application scenario, the master speaker and the slave speaker can negotiate and update the speaker key and certificate through the first wireless local area network. In the second application scenario, the master speaker and the slave speaker can negotiate and update the speaker keys and credentials through the second wireless local area network.
在一些实施例中,手机100还可以向主音箱指示各个从音箱的角色。例如,手机100可以向N个音箱中的主音箱发送各个从音箱的ID和角色,及其对应关系(如表4所示的角色与ID的对应关系)。In some embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may also indicate to the master speaker the role of each slave speaker. For example, the mobile phone 100 may send the ID and role of each slave speaker to the master speaker among the N speakers, and their corresponding relationship (as shown in Table 4, the corresponding relationship between roles and IDs).
在一种实现方式中,上述配置信息1中可以包括各个从音箱的ID和角色,及其对应关系。In an implementation manner, the above configuration information 1 may include the IDs and roles of each slave speaker, and their corresponding relationships.
在另一种实现方式中,各个从音箱的ID和角色,及其对应关系可以不包括在上述配置信息1中。手机100可以在向音箱(如音箱201)发送加密信息(如加密信息1)之后,或者接收到来自音箱(如音箱201)的确认消息(如确认消息1)之后,采用该音箱通过短距消息传输的秘钥(如秘钥1)加密上述各个从音箱的ID和角色及其对应关系,然后向该音箱(如音箱201)发送加密后的信息。音箱(如音箱201)可以解密该信息,得到上述各个从音箱的ID和角色,及其对应关系。In another implementation manner, the IDs and roles of each slave speaker, and their corresponding relationships may not be included in the configuration information 1 above. After the mobile phone 100 sends encrypted information (such as encrypted information 1) to the speaker (such as the speaker 201), or receives a confirmation message (such as confirmation message 1) from the speaker (such as the speaker 201), the mobile phone 100 can use the speaker to pass the short-distance message. The transmitted secret key (eg, secret key 1 ) encrypts the IDs and roles of the above-mentioned slave speakers and their corresponding relationships, and then sends the encrypted information to the speaker (eg, speaker 201 ). The speaker (eg, speaker 201 ) can decrypt the information to obtain the IDs and roles of the above-mentioned slave speakers, and their corresponding relationships.
在一些实施例中,手机100响应于用户在第一界面的操作a,便可以广播NAN发布消息。而不是响应于用户在第二界面的操作b,才广播NAN发布消息。具体的,上述S504可以替换为图18所示的S1801,上述S505可以替换为图18所示的S1802。In some embodiments, the mobile phone 100 may broadcast the NAN release message in response to the user's operation a on the first interface. Instead of responding to the user's operation b on the second interface, the NAN publishing message is broadcast. Specifically, the above S504 may be replaced by S1801 shown in FIG. 18 , and the above S505 may be replaced by S1802 shown in FIG. 18 .
S1801、手机100广播NAN发布消息。S1801, the mobile phone 100 broadcasts the NAN release message.
其中,响应于用户在第一界面的操作a,手机100不仅可以执行S503中“显示第二界面”的操作,还可以执行S1801。Wherein, in response to the user's operation a on the first interface, the mobile phone 100 can not only execute the operation of "displaying the second interface" in S503, but also execute S1801.
S1802、响应于用户在第二界面的操作b,显示第三界面。该第三界面用于提示用户将手机100靠近角色1的音箱,使手机100与角色1的音箱之间的距离在第一距离内。S1802. In response to the user's operation b on the second interface, display a third interface. The third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the mobile phone 100 close to the speaker of the character 1, so that the distance between the mobile phone 100 and the speaker of the character 1 is within the first distance.
例如,响应于用户对图19所示的第一界面701中“环绕声组合音箱”选项703的操作a,手机100可以执行图18所示的S503显示图7B或图7C所示的第二界面704,并执行图18所示的S1801,如图19所示发布NAN服务(即广播NAN发布消息)。响应于用户在图7B或图7C所示的第二界面704的操作b,手机100可以显示图9A或图9B所示的第三界面。For example, in response to the user's operation a on the "surround sound combination speaker" option 703 in the first interface 701 shown in FIG. 19 , the mobile phone 100 may perform S503 shown in FIG. 18 to display the second interface shown in FIG. 7B or 7C 704, and execute S1801 shown in FIG. 18, as shown in FIG. 19, publish the NAN service (that is, broadcast the NAN publishing message). In response to the user's operation b on the second interface 704 shown in FIG. 7B or 7C, the mobile phone 100 may display the third interface shown in FIG. 9A or 9B.
本申请实施例中,手机100可以响应于用户在第二界面的操作b发布NAN服务,或者响应于用户在第一界面的操作a发布NAN服务。本申请实施例对此不作限制。In this embodiment of the present application, the mobile phone 100 may publish the NAN service in response to the user's operation b on the second interface, or publish the NAN service in response to the user's operation a on the first interface. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
可以理解的是,上述电子设备(如手机)和音箱为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请实施例能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请实施例的范围。It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the above-mentioned electronic devices (such as mobile phones) and speakers include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that, in conjunction with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Experts may use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对上述电子设备(如手机)和音箱进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In this embodiment of the present application, functional modules can be divided into the electronic device (such as a mobile phone) and a speaker according to the above method examples. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one in the processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that, the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division manners in actual implementation.
图20示出了上述实施例中所涉及的电子设备(如手机100)和音箱的一种可能的结构示意图。如图20所示,电子设备2010可以包括音箱组合管理模块2011;音箱2020可以包括超短距模块2021和组合模块2022;音箱2030可以包括超短距模块2031和组合模块2032。FIG. 20 shows a possible schematic structural diagram of the electronic device (eg, the mobile phone 100 ) and the sound box involved in the above embodiment. As shown in FIG. 20 , the electronic device 2010 may include a sound box combination management module 2011 ; the sound box 2020 may include an ultra-short-range module 2021 and a combination module 2022 ; the sound box 2030 may include an ultra-short-range module 2031 and a combination module 2032 .
其中,音箱组合管理模块2011,用于负责引导用户将每个音箱加入组合并指定角色,将配置信息传递给音箱2020和音箱2030。例如,音箱组合管理模块2011用于支持电子设备2010执行上述实例中的S502,S503,S504,S505,S510,S511,S517,S518,S519,S523,S1402,S1404,S1801,S1802,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。Among them, the speaker combination management module 2011 is used to guide the user to add each speaker to the combination and specify a role, and transmit the configuration information to the speaker 2020 and the speaker 2030 . For example, the speaker combination management module 2011 is used to support the electronic device 2010 to perform S502, S503, S504, S505, S510, S511, S517, S518, S519, S523, S1402, S1404, S1801, S1802, and/or use Other procedures for the techniques described herein.
超短距模块2021,用于负责在安全距离向电子设备2010发送短距消息。例如,超短距模块2021用于支持音箱2020执行上述实例中的S508,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。The ultra-short-range module 2021 is used for sending short-range messages to the electronic device 2010 at a safe distance. For example, the ultra-short-range module 2021 is used to support the speaker 2020 to perform S508 in the above examples, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
组合模块2022,用于处理音箱间的数据传输和根据音箱角色播放对应声道的数据。例如,组合模块2022用于支持音箱2020执行上述实例中的S501,S506,S507,S508a,S512,S513,S514,S1401,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。The combination module 2022 is used to process the data transmission between the speakers and play the data of the corresponding channel according to the role of the speakers. For example, the combination module 2022 is used to support the speaker 2020 to perform S501, S506, S507, S508a, S512, S513, S514, S1401 in the above examples, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
超短距模块2031,用于负责在安全距离向电子设备2010发送短距消息。例如,超短距模块2031用于支持音箱2020执行上述实例中的S509,S516,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。The ultra-short-range module 2031 is used for sending short-range messages to the electronic device 2010 at a safe distance. For example, the ultra-short-range module 2031 is used to support the loudspeaker 2020 to perform S509, S516 in the above examples, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
组合模块2032,用于处理音箱间的数据传输和根据音箱角色播放对应声道的数据。例如,组合模块2032用于支持音箱2030执行上述实例中的S501,S506,S507,S509a, S515,S516a,S520,S521,S522,S1403,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。The combination module 2032 is used to process the data transmission between the speakers and play the data of the corresponding channel according to the role of the speakers. For example, the combination module 2032 is used to support the speaker 2030 to perform S501, S506, S507, S509a, S515, S516a, S520, S521, S522, S1403, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein in the above examples.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,上述电子设备2010的音箱组合管理模块2011的功能可以集成在处理模块、显示模块和通信模块中实现。上述音箱2020的超短距模块2021的功能可以集成在通信模块中实现,组合模块2022的功能可以集成在处理模块和通信模块中实现。上述音箱2030的超短距模块2031的功能可以集成在通信模块中实现,组合模块2032的功能可以集成在处理模块和通信模块中实现。音箱2020和音箱2030还可以包括显示模块,该显示模块用于显示提示信息(如提示信息1或提示信息2)。In the case of using an integrated unit, the functions of the speaker combination management module 2011 of the electronic device 2010 can be integrated into the processing module, the display module and the communication module. The function of the ultra-short-range module 2021 of the above-mentioned speaker 2020 may be integrated into the communication module, and the function of the combination module 2022 may be integrated into the processing module and the communication module. The function of the ultra-short-range module 2031 of the above-mentioned speaker 2030 can be integrated into the communication module, and the function of the combination module 2032 can be integrated into the processing module and the communication module. The speaker 2020 and the speaker 2030 may further include a display module, and the display module is used to display prompt information (eg, prompt information 1 or prompt information 2).
当然,电子设备2010、音箱2020和音箱2030的单元模块包括但不限于上述处理模块、显示模块和通信模块。例如,电子设备2010、音箱2020和音箱2030还可以包括存储模块。Of course, the unit modules of the electronic device 2010, the sound box 2020 and the sound box 2030 include but are not limited to the above-mentioned processing module, display module and communication module. For example, the electronic device 2010, the sound box 2020, and the sound box 2030 may also include a storage module.
例如,针对电子设备2010而言,处理模块可以为一个或多个处理器(如图2所示的处理器110),通信模块包括无线通信模块(如图2所示的无线通信模块160)。无线通信模块可以称为通信接口。存储模块可以为存储器(如图2所示的内部存储器121)。显示模块可以为显示屏(如图2所示的显示屏194)。其中,上述一个或多个处理器、无线通信模块、存储器和显示屏等可以连接在一起,例如通过总线连接。上述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,该计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当处理器执行计算机指令时,电子设备2010可执行上述方法实施例中手机100执行的各个功能或者步骤。该电子设备2010的结构可以参考图2所示的电子设备100的结构。For example, for the electronic device 2010, the processing module may be one or more processors (the processor 110 shown in FIG. 2), and the communication module includes a wireless communication module (the wireless communication module 160 shown in FIG. 2). The wireless communication module may be referred to as a communication interface. The storage module may be a memory (the internal memory 121 shown in FIG. 2 ). The display module may be a display screen (display screen 194 shown in FIG. 2 ). Wherein, the above-mentioned one or more processors, wireless communication modules, memory and display screen, etc. can be connected together, for example, connected by a bus. The memory described above is used to store computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions. When the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device 2010 can execute various functions or steps executed by the mobile phone 100 in the foregoing method embodiments. The structure of the electronic device 2010 may refer to the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 .
例如,针对音箱(如音箱2020或音箱2030)而言,处理模块可以为一个或多个处理器(如图3所示的处理器3001),通信模块包括无线通信模块(如图3所示的无线通信模块308)。无线通信模块可以称为通信接口。存储模块可以为存储器(如图3所示的内部存储器303)。显示模块可以为显示屏(如图3所示的显示屏306)。其中,上述一个或多个处理器、无线通信模块、存储器和显示屏等可以连接在一起,例如通过总线连接。上述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,该计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当处理器执行计算机指令时,音箱可执行上述方法实施例中音箱201或音箱202执行的各个功能或者步骤。该音箱的结构可以参考图3所示的音箱300的结构。For example, for a sound box (such as sound box 2020 or sound box 2030 ), the processing module may be one or more processors (such as the processor 3001 shown in FIG. 3 ), and the communication module includes a wireless communication module (shown in FIG. 3 ) wireless communication module 308). The wireless communication module may be referred to as a communication interface. The storage module may be a memory (internal memory 303 as shown in FIG. 3 ). The display module may be a display screen (display screen 306 shown in FIG. 3 ). Wherein, the above-mentioned one or more processors, wireless communication modules, memory and display screen, etc. can be connected together, for example, connected by a bus. The memory described above is used to store computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions. When the processor executes the computer instructions, the sound box can perform various functions or steps performed by the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 in the above method embodiments. The structure of the sound box may refer to the structure of the sound box 300 shown in FIG. 3 .
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片系统,该芯片系统可以应用于上述电子设备或者音箱。如图21所示,该芯片系统2100包括至少一个处理器2101和至少一个接口电路2102。该处理器2101和接口电路2102可通过线路互联。例如,接口电路2102可用于从其它装置(例如电子设备或者音箱的存储器)接收信号。又例如,接口电路2102可用于向其它装置(例如电子设备或者音箱的处理器2101)发送信号。示例性的,接口电路2102可读取存储器中存储的指令,并将该指令发送给处理器2101。当然,该芯片系统还可以包含其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, and the chip system can be applied to the above-mentioned electronic device or sound box. As shown in FIG. 21 , the chip system 2100 includes at least one processor 2101 and at least one interface circuit 2102 . The processor 2101 and the interface circuit 2102 can be interconnected by wires. For example, the interface circuit 2102 may be used to receive signals from other devices, such as electronics or the memory of a speaker. For another example, the interface circuit 2102 may be used to send signals to other devices (eg, the processor 2101 of an electronic device or a speaker). Exemplarily, the interface circuit 2102 can read the instructions stored in the memory and send the instructions to the processor 2101 . Certainly, the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
当所述指令被处理器2101执行时,可使得电子设备(如图2所示的电子设备100)执行上述实施例中手机100的各个步骤。When the instructions are executed by the processor 2101, the electronic device (such as the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2) can be made to execute various steps of the mobile phone 100 in the above embodiment.
当所述指令被处理器2101执行时,可使得音箱(如图3所示的音箱300)执行上述实施例中音箱201或音箱202的各个步骤。When the instruction is executed by the processor 2101 , the sound box (the sound box 300 shown in FIG. 3 ) can be caused to perform each step of the sound box 201 or the sound box 202 in the above-mentioned embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令, 当所述计算机指令在上述电子设备(如图2所示的电子设备100)上运行时,使得该电子设备执行上述方法实施例中手机100执行的各个功能或者步骤。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions are executed on the above electronic device (the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 2 ), the electronic device is made to execute the above Each function or step performed by the mobile phone 100 in the method embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述方法实施例中手机100执行的各个功能或者步骤。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, enables the computer to perform each function or step performed by the mobile phone 100 in the above method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在上述音箱(如图3所示的音箱300)上运行时,使得该音箱执行上述方法实施例中音箱201或音箱202执行的各个功能或者步骤。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions are executed on the above-mentioned sound box (the sound box 300 shown in FIG. 3 ), the sound box is made to execute the above method embodiments Each function or step performed by the speaker 201 or the speaker 202.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述方法实施例中音箱201或音箱202执行的各个功能或者步骤。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, enables the computer to execute each function or step performed by the speaker 201 or the speaker 202 in the above method embodiments.
本申请另一些实施例提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备可以包括:上述触摸屏、存储器和一个或多个处理器。该触摸屏、存储器和处理器耦合。该存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,该计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当处理器执行计算机指令时,电子设备可执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。该电子设备的结构可以参考图1所示的电子设备100的结构。Other embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, and the electronic device may include: the above-mentioned touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors. The touch screen, memory and processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program code comprising computer instructions. When the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device can execute various functions or steps executed by the mobile phone in the foregoing method embodiments. For the structure of the electronic device, reference may be made to the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 .
本申请另一些实施例提供一种显示装置,其特征在于,该装置可以应用于包括上述触摸屏的电子设备。该装置用于执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。Other embodiments of the present application provide a display device, which is characterized in that the device can be applied to an electronic device including the above-mentioned touch screen. The apparatus is configured to perform each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the above method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片系统,如图15所示,该芯片系统包括至少一个处理器1501和至少一个接口电路1502。处理器1501和接口电路1502可通过线路互联。例如,接口电路1502可用于从其它装置(例如电子设备的存储器)接收信号。又例如,接口电路1502可用于向其它装置(例如处理器1501)发送信号。示例性的,接口电路1502可读取存储器中存储的指令,并将该指令发送给处理器1501。当所述指令被处理器1501执行时,可使得电子设备执行上述实施例中的各个步骤。当然,该芯片系统还可以包含其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system. As shown in FIG. 15 , the chip system includes at least one processor 1501 and at least one interface circuit 1502 . The processor 1501 and the interface circuit 1502 may be interconnected by wires. For example, the interface circuit 1502 may be used to receive signals from other devices, such as the memory of an electronic device. As another example, the interface circuit 1502 may be used to send signals to other devices (eg, the processor 1501). Exemplarily, the interface circuit 1502 may read the instructions stored in the memory and send the instructions to the processor 1501 . When the instructions are executed by the processor 1501, the electronic device can be caused to perform the various steps in the above embodiments. Certainly, the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在上述电子设备上运行时,使得该电子设备执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions are executed on the above-mentioned electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above-mentioned method embodiments .
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, enables the computer to perform various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above method embodiments.
通过以上实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。From the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of the above functional modules is used as an example for illustration. In practical applications, the above functions can be allocated by Different functional modules are completed, that is, the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules, so as to complete all or part of the functions described above.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些 接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be Incorporation may either be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components shown as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机,芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, which are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions to make a device (may be a single chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.
以上内容,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above contents are only specific embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto, and any changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application should be covered within the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (33)

  1. 一种组合音箱的配置方法,其特征在于,用于电子设备配置组合音箱,所述电子设备中安装有第一应用APP,所述组合音箱包括多个音箱,每个音箱包括第一天线和第二天线,所述第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,所述第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,所述第一距离小于所述第二距离,所述方法包括:A method for configuring a combined sound box, characterized in that it is used for an electronic device to configure a combined sound box, a first application APP is installed in the electronic device, the combined sound box includes a plurality of sound boxes, and each sound box includes a first antenna and a second sound box. Two antennas, the transmission distance of the first antenna is a first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is a second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance, and the method includes:
    所述电子设备显示所述第一APP的第一界面;其中,所述第一界面用于触发所述电子设备构建N声道的组合音箱,N≥2,N为正整数;The electronic device displays a first interface of the first APP; wherein, the first interface is used to trigger the electronic device to construct an N-channel combination speaker, where N≥2, and N is a positive integer;
    响应于用户在第一界面的第一操作,所述电子设备显示第二界面;其中,所述第二界面用于指示所述N声道的N个音箱的摆放布局,所述N个音箱中每个音箱的角色由所述N个音箱的摆放布局决定;In response to the user's first operation on the first interface, the electronic device displays a second interface; wherein, the second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels, and the N speakers The role of each speaker is determined by the placement of the N speakers;
    响应于用户在所述第二界面的第二操作,所述电子设备广播临近感知网络NAN发布消息,其中,所述NAN发布消息用于指示订阅NAN服务的音箱使用所述第一天线;In response to the user's second operation on the second interface, the electronic device broadcasts a proximity-aware network NAN release message, wherein the NAN release message is used to instruct the speaker subscribed to the NAN service to use the first antenna;
    所述N个音箱中的第一音箱接收到所述NAN发布消息,响应于所述NAN发布消息,所述第一音箱使用所述第一天线广播第一消息;The first speaker in the N speakers receives the NAN release message, and in response to the NAN release message, the first speaker broadcasts the first message using the first antenna;
    所述电子设备显示第三界面;所述第三界面用于提示用户将所述电子设备靠近所述N个音箱中第一角色的音箱,使所述电子设备与所述第一角色的音箱之间的距离在所述第一距离内;所述第三界面还用于指示所述N个音箱中一个或多个音箱的角色,所述一个或多个音箱包括所述第一角色的音箱;The electronic device displays a third interface; the third interface is used to prompt the user to move the electronic device close to the sound box of the first role among the N sound boxes, so that the electronic device and the sound box of the first role are separated. The distance between them is within the first distance; the third interface is also used to indicate the role of one or more sound boxes in the N sound boxes, and the one or more sound boxes include the sound box of the first role;
    所述电子设备接收来自所述第一角色的所述第一音箱的所述第一消息,所述第一消息包括所述第一音箱的标识和第一秘钥;The electronic device receives the first message from the first speaker of the first role, and the first message includes an identifier of the first speaker and a first secret key;
    所述电子设备向所述第一音箱发送第一加密信息,所述第一加密信息是采用所述第一秘钥加密第一配置信息得到的,所述第一配置信息包括第一配网信息和第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一音箱被配置为所述第一角色,所述第一配网信息用于支持所述第一音箱与所述N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。The electronic device sends first encrypted information to the first speaker, the first encrypted information is obtained by encrypting first configuration information with the first secret key, and the first configuration information includes first distribution network information and first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the first role, and the first distribution network information is used to support the first speaker and the N speakers interact with other speakers.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述N个音箱中的第二音箱接收到所述NAN发布消息,响应于所述NAN发布消息,所述第二音箱使用所述第一天线广播第二消息;The second speaker in the N speakers receives the NAN release message, and in response to the NAN release message, the second speaker broadcasts the second message using the first antenna;
    所述电子设备显示第四界面,所述第四界面用于提示用户将所述电子设备靠近所述N个音箱中第二角色的音箱,使所述电子设备与所述第二角色的音箱之间的距离在所述第一距离内;其中,所述第四界面还用于指示所述N个音箱中包括所述第二角色的音箱在内的一个或多个音箱的角色;The electronic device displays a fourth interface, and the fourth interface is used to prompt the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the second role among the N sound boxes, so that the electronic device and the sound box of the second role are separated. The distance between them is within the first distance; wherein, the fourth interface is also used to indicate the roles of one or more speakers including the speakers of the second role in the N speakers;
    所述电子设备接收来自所述第二角色的所述第二音箱的所述第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述第二音箱的标识和第二秘钥;The electronic device receives the second message from the second speaker of the second role, and the second message includes an identifier of the second speaker and a second secret key;
    所述电子设备向所述第二音箱发送第二加密信息,所述第二加密信息是采用所述第二秘钥加密第二配置信息得到的,所述第二配置信息包括第二配网信息和第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第二音箱被配置为所述第二角色,所述第二配网信息用于支持所述第二音箱与所述N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。The electronic device sends second encrypted information to the second speaker, the second encrypted information is obtained by encrypting second configuration information with the second key, and the second configuration information includes second distribution network information and second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as the second role, and the second distribution network information is used to support the second speaker and the N speakers interact with other speakers.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述电子设备向所述第一音箱发送第一加密信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein after the electronic device sends the first encrypted information to the first sound box, the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收到来自所述第一音箱的第一确认消息,所述第一确认消息用于指示所述第一音箱配置成功;The electronic device receives a first confirmation message from the first sound box, where the first confirmation message is used to indicate that the first sound box is successfully configured;
    其中,所述电子设备显示第四界面,包括:Wherein, the electronic device displays a fourth interface, including:
    所述电子设备接收到所述第一确认消息后,显示所述第四界面。After receiving the first confirmation message, the electronic device displays the fourth interface.
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息还包括第一身份信息,所述第一身份信息用于指示所述第二音箱被配置为从音箱,还用于指示所述第二音箱接入主音箱作为接入点AP提供第一无线局域网;所述第二配网信息包括:所述第一无线局域网的第一服务集标识SSID和第一接入密码;The method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the second configuration information further includes first identity information, and the first identity information is used to indicate that the second sound box is configured as a slave sound box, and further uses To instruct the second speaker to access the main speaker as an access point AP to provide the first wireless local area network; the second network configuration information includes: the first service set identifier SSID of the first wireless local area network and the first access password ;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述第二音箱根据所述第一SSID和所述第一接入密码,接入所述第一无线局域网,并通过所述第一无线局域网与主音箱交互。The second speaker accesses the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password, and interacts with the main speaker through the first wireless local area network.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息,所述第二身份信息用于指示所述第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示所述第一音箱作为接入点AP提供第一无线局域网;The method according to any one of claims 1-4, wherein the first configuration information further includes second identity information, and the second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as a master a sound box, also used to instruct the first sound box to provide the first wireless local area network as an access point AP;
    所述第一配网信息包括:所述第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码;或者,所述方法还包括:所述电子设备从所述第一音箱获取所述第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码;The first network distribution information includes: a first SSID and a first access password of the first wireless local area network; or, the method further includes: acquiring, by the electronic device, the first wireless network from the first speaker The first SSID and the first access password of the local area network;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述第一音箱作为所述AP提供所述第一无线局域网,并由所述组合音箱中的其他音箱接入所述第一无线局域网,通过所述第一无线局域网与所述组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。The first sound box provides the first wireless local area network as the AP, and other sound boxes in the combined sound box are connected to the first wireless local area network, and the first wireless local area network and the combined sound box are connected to the first wireless local area network through the first wireless local area network. Interact with other speakers.
  6. 根据权利要求2-4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息还包括第一身份信息,所述第一身份信息用于指示所述第二音箱被配置为从音箱,还用于指示所述第二音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网;所述第二配网信息包括:所述第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码;The method according to any one of claims 2-4, wherein the second configuration information further includes first identity information, and the first identity information is used to indicate that the second sound box is configured to be from The speaker is also used to instruct the second speaker to access the second wireless local area network provided by the router; the second network distribution information includes: the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述第二音箱根据所述第二SSID和所述第二接入密码,接入所述第二无线局域网,并通过所述第二无线局域网与所述N个音箱中的主音箱交互;The second speaker is connected to the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and interacts with the main speaker in the N speakers through the second wireless local area network;
    其中,所述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息,所述第二身份信息用于指示所述第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示所述第一音箱接入路由器提供的所述第二无线局域网;所述第一配网信息还包括:所述第二无线局域网的所述第二SSID和所述第二接入密码;Wherein, the first configuration information further includes second identity information, and the second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as a main speaker, and is also used to indicate that the first speaker is connected to the information provided by the router. the second wireless local area network; the first network distribution information further includes: the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述第一音箱根据所述第二SSID和所述第二接入密码,接入所述第二无线局域网,并通过所述第二无线局域网与所述组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。The first sound box accesses the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and interacts with other sound boxes in the combined sound box through the second wireless local area network.
  7. 根据权利要求2-6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括用于所述N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证;所述第二配置信息还包括用于所述N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证;The method according to any one of claims 2-6, wherein the first configuration information further includes a speaker key and a certificate for the interaction of the N speakers; the second configuration information further includes Speaker keys and credentials for the interaction of the N speakers;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述第一音箱与所述第二音箱根据所述音箱秘钥和所述凭证通过所述第一音箱提供的第一无线局域网交互。The first speaker interacts with the second speaker through a first wireless local area network provided by the first speaker according to the speaker key and the credential.
  8. 根据权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法,所述音箱第一使用所述第一天线广播第一消息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein the sound box first broadcasts a first message using the first antenna, comprising:
    所述第一音箱周期性使用所述第一天线和所述第二天线;The first sound box periodically uses the first antenna and the second antenna;
    所述第一音箱使用所述第一天线时,广播所述第一消息。When the first speaker uses the first antenna, the first message is broadcast.
  9. 一种组合音箱的配置方法,其特征在于,用于电子设备配置组合音箱,所述电子设备中安装有第一应用APP,所述组合音箱包括多个音箱,每个音箱包括第一天线和第二天线,所述第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,所述第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,所述第一距离小于所述第二距离,所述方法包括:A method for configuring a combined sound box, characterized in that it is used for an electronic device to configure a combined sound box, a first application APP is installed in the electronic device, the combined sound box includes a plurality of sound boxes, and each sound box includes a first antenna and a second sound box. Two antennas, the transmission distance of the first antenna is a first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is a second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance, and the method includes:
    所述电子设备显示所述第一APP的第一界面;其中,所述第一界面用于触发所述电子设备构建N声道的组合音箱,N≥2,N为正整数;The electronic device displays a first interface of the first APP; wherein, the first interface is used to trigger the electronic device to construct an N-channel combination speaker, where N≥2, and N is a positive integer;
    响应于用户在第一界面的第一操作,所述电子设备显示第二界面;其中,所述第二界面用于指示所述N声道的N个音箱的摆放布局,所述N个音箱中每个音箱的角色由所述N个音箱的摆放布局决定;In response to the user's first operation on the first interface, the electronic device displays a second interface; wherein, the second interface is used to indicate the arrangement of the N speakers of the N channels, and the N speakers The role of each speaker is determined by the placement of the N speakers;
    响应于用户在所述第二界面的第二操作,所述电子设备广播临近感知网络NAN发布消息,并显示第三界面;其中,所述NAN发布消息用于指示订阅NAN服务的音箱使用所述第一天线;所述第三界面用于提示用户将所述电子设备靠近所述N个音箱中第一角色的音箱,使所述电子设备与所述第一角色的音箱之间的距离在所述第一距离内;所述第三界面还用于指示所述N个音箱中包括所述第一角色的音箱在内的一个或多个音箱的角色;In response to the user's second operation on the second interface, the electronic device broadcasts a proximity-aware network NAN release message, and displays a third interface; wherein the NAN release message is used to instruct speakers subscribed to the NAN service to use the The first antenna; the third interface is used to prompt the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the first role among the N sound boxes, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the first role is within within the first distance; the third interface is also used to indicate the roles of one or more speakers including the speakers of the first role in the N speakers;
    所述电子设备接收来自所述第一角色的第一音箱的第一消息,所述第一消息包括所述第一音箱的标识和第一秘钥;The electronic device receives a first message from the first speaker of the first role, and the first message includes an identifier of the first speaker and a first secret key;
    所述电子设备向所述第一音箱发送第一加密信息,所述第一加密信息是采用所述第一秘钥加密第一配置信息得到的,所述第一配置信息包括第一配网信息和第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一音箱被配置为所述第一角色,所述第一配网信息用于支持所述第一音箱与所述N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。The electronic device sends first encrypted information to the first speaker, the first encrypted information is obtained by encrypting first configuration information with the first secret key, and the first configuration information includes first distribution network information and first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the first role, and the first distribution network information is used to support the first speaker and the N speakers interact with other speakers.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面还用于指示所述N个音箱中每个音箱的角色。The method according to claim 9, wherein the second interface is further used to indicate the role of each speaker in the N speakers.
  11. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述电子设备向所述第一音箱发送第一加密信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein after the electronic device sends the first encrypted information to the first sound box, the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备显示第四界面,所述第四界面用于提示用户将所述电子设备靠近所述N个音箱中第二角色的音箱,使所述电子设备与所述第二角色的音箱之间的距离在所述第一距离内;其中,所述第四界面还用于指示所述N个音箱中包括所述第二角色的音箱在内的一个或多个音箱的角色;The electronic device displays a fourth interface, and the fourth interface is used to prompt the user to bring the electronic device close to the sound box of the second role among the N sound boxes, so that the electronic device and the sound box of the second role are separated. The distance between them is within the first distance; wherein, the fourth interface is also used to indicate the roles of one or more speakers including the speakers of the second role in the N speakers;
    所述电子设备接收来自所述第二角色的第二音箱的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述第二音箱的标识和第二秘钥;The electronic device receives a second message from the second speaker of the second role, and the second message includes an identifier of the second speaker and a second secret key;
    所述电子设备向所述第二音箱发送第二加密信息,所述第二加密信息是采用所述第二秘钥加密第二配置信息得到的,所述第二配置信息包括第二配网信息和第二指示 信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第二音箱被配置为所述第二角色,所述第二配网信息用于支持所述第二音箱与所述N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。The electronic device sends second encrypted information to the second speaker, the second encrypted information is obtained by encrypting second configuration information with the second key, and the second configuration information includes second distribution network information and second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as the second role, and the second distribution network information is used to support the second speaker and the N speakers interact with other speakers.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备显示第四界面,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the electronic device displays a fourth interface, comprising:
    所述电子设备接收到来自所述第一音箱的第一确认消息后,显示所述第四界面;After receiving the first confirmation message from the first speaker, the electronic device displays the fourth interface;
    其中,所述第一确认消息用于指示所述第一音箱配置成功。Wherein, the first confirmation message is used to indicate that the configuration of the first speaker is successful.
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息还包括第一身份信息,所述第一身份信息用于指示所述第二音箱被配置为从音箱,还用于指示所述第二音箱接入主音箱作为接入点AP提供第一无线局域网;The method according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the second configuration information further comprises first identity information, and the first identity information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and further uses instructing the second speaker to access the main speaker as an access point AP to provide a first wireless local area network;
    所述第二配网信息包括:所述第一无线局域网的第一服务集标识SSID和第一接入密码。The second network distribution information includes: a first service set identifier SSID of the first wireless local area network and a first access password.
  14. 根据权利要求11-13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息,所述第二身份信息用于指示所述第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示所述第一音箱作为接入点AP提供第一无线局域网;The method according to any one of claims 11-13, wherein the first configuration information further includes second identity information, and the second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as a master a sound box, also used to instruct the first sound box to provide the first wireless local area network as an access point AP;
    所述第一配网信息包括:所述第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码;或者,所述方法还包括:所述电子设备从所述第一音箱获取所述第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码。The first network distribution information includes: a first SSID and a first access password of the first wireless local area network; or, the method further includes: acquiring, by the electronic device, the first wireless network from the first speaker The first SSID and first access password of the local area network.
  15. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息还包括第一身份信息,所述第一身份信息用于指示所述第二音箱被配置为从音箱,还用于指示所述第二音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网;所述第二配网信息包括:所述第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码;The method according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the second configuration information further comprises first identity information, and the first identity information is used to indicate that the second speaker is configured as a slave speaker, and further uses to instruct the second speaker to access the second wireless local area network provided by the router; the second network distribution information includes: the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network;
    所述第一配置信息还包括第二身份信息,所述第二身份信息用于指示所述第一音箱被配置为主音箱,还用于指示所述第一音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网;所述第一配网信息还包括:所述第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码。The first configuration information further includes second identity information, and the second identity information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as a main speaker, and is also used to indicate that the first speaker is connected to the second wireless device provided by the router. A local area network; the first network distribution information further includes: a second SSID and a second access password of the second wireless local area network.
  16. 根据权利要求11-13或15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息还包括用于所述N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证。The method according to any one of claims 11-13 or 15, wherein the second configuration information further includes a speaker key and a credential used for the interaction of the N speakers.
  17. 根据权利要求9-16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括用于所述N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证。The method according to any one of claims 9-16, wherein the first configuration information further includes a speaker key and a credential for the interaction of the N speakers.
  18. 一种组合音箱的配置方法,其特征在于,用于电子设备配置组合音箱,所述电子设备中安装有第一应用APP,所述组合音箱包括多个音箱,每个音箱包括第一天线和第二天线,所述第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,所述第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,所述第一距离小于所述第二距离,所述方法包括:A method for configuring a combined sound box, characterized in that it is used for an electronic device to configure a combined sound box, a first application APP is installed in the electronic device, the combined sound box includes a plurality of sound boxes, and each sound box includes a first antenna and a second sound box. Two antennas, the transmission distance of the first antenna is a first distance, and the transmission distance of the second antenna is a second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance, and the method includes:
    所述电子设备显示所述第一APP的第一界面;其中,所述第一界面用于触发所述电子设备构建N声道的组合音箱,N≥2,N为正整数;The electronic device displays a first interface of the first APP; wherein, the first interface is used to trigger the electronic device to construct an N-channel combination speaker, where N≥2, and N is a positive integer;
    响应于用户在第一界面的第一操作,所述电子设备显示第二界面,并广播临近感知网络NAN发布消息;其中,所述第二界面用于指示所述N声道的N个音箱的摆放布局,所述N个音箱中每个音箱的角色由所述N个音箱的摆放布局决定;所述NAN发布消息用于指示订阅NAN服务的音箱使用所述第一天线;In response to the user's first operation on the first interface, the electronic device displays a second interface, and broadcasts a proximity-aware network NAN release message; wherein the second interface is used to indicate the N sound boxes of the N channels. The placement layout, the role of each loudspeaker in the N loudspeakers is determined by the placement layout of the N loudspeakers; the NAN publishing message is used to instruct the loudspeaker that subscribes to the NAN service to use the first antenna;
    响应于用户在所述第二界面的第二操作,所述电子设备显示第三界面;其中,所 述第三界面用于提示用户将所述电子设备靠近所述N个音箱中第一角色的音箱,使所述电子设备与所述第一角色的音箱之间的距离在所述第一距离内;所述第三界面还用于指示所述N个音箱中包括所述第一角色的音箱在内的一个或多个每个音箱的角色;In response to the user's second operation on the second interface, the electronic device displays a third interface; wherein the third interface is used to prompt the user to move the electronic device close to the first character in the N speakers. A sound box, so that the distance between the electronic device and the sound box of the first role is within the first distance; the third interface is also used to indicate that the N sound boxes include the sound box of the first role one or more of the roles of each speaker;
    所述电子设备接收来自所述第一角色的第一音箱的第一消息,所述第一消息包括所述第一音箱的标识和第一秘钥;The electronic device receives a first message from the first speaker of the first role, and the first message includes an identifier of the first speaker and a first secret key;
    所述电子设备向所述第一音箱发送第一加密信息,所述第一加密信息是采用所述第一秘钥加密第一配置信息得到的,所述第一配置信息包括第一配网信息和第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一音箱被配置为所述第一角色,所述第一配网信息用于支持所述第一音箱与所述N个音箱中的其他音箱交互。The electronic device sends first encrypted information to the first speaker, the first encrypted information is obtained by encrypting first configuration information with the first secret key, and the first configuration information includes first distribution network information and first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate that the first speaker is configured as the first role, and the first distribution network information is used to support the first speaker and the N speakers interact with other speakers.
  19. 一种组合音箱的配置方法,其特征在于,应用于音箱,所述音箱包括第一天线和第二天线,所述第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,所述第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,所述第一距离小于所述第二距离,所述方法包括:A configuration method of a combined sound box is characterized in that, when applied to a sound box, the sound box includes a first antenna and a second antenna, the emission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, and the emission distance of the second antenna is A second distance, where the first distance is smaller than the second distance, and the method includes:
    所述音箱接收所述电子设备广播的临近感知网络NAN发布消息,所述NAN发布消息用于指示所述音箱使用所述第一天线;The speaker receives a proximity sensing network NAN release message broadcast by the electronic device, and the NAN release message is used to instruct the speaker to use the first antenna;
    响应于所述NAN发布消息,所述音箱使用所述第一天线广播消息;其中,所述消息中包括所述音箱的标识和秘钥;In response to the NAN publishing a message, the speaker broadcasts a message using the first antenna; wherein the message includes an identifier and a secret key of the speaker;
    所述音箱接收来自所述电子设备的加密信息,并采用所述秘钥解密所述加密信息得到所述配置信息;其中,所述加密信息是所述电子设备接收到所述消息后发送的,所述加密信息是采用所述秘钥加密配置信息得到的,所述配置信息包括角色指示信息和配网信息,所述角色指示信息用于指示所述音箱被配置的角色,所述配网信息用于支持所述音箱与组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。The speaker receives the encrypted information from the electronic device, and uses the secret key to decrypt the encrypted information to obtain the configuration information; wherein the encrypted information is sent by the electronic device after receiving the message, The encrypted information is obtained by encrypting the configuration information with the secret key. The configuration information includes role indication information and network distribution information. The role indication information is used to indicate the role that the speaker is configured with. The network distribution information Used to support the interaction between the speaker and other speakers in the combination speaker.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 19, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述音箱订阅NAN服务;其中,订阅所述NAN服务的设备能够接收并响应所述NAN发布消息。The speaker subscribes to a NAN service; wherein, a device subscribed to the NAN service can receive and respond to the NAN publishing message.
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述音箱发出提示信息,所述提示信息用于指示所述音箱被配置的角色。The speaker sends out prompt information, and the prompt information is used to indicate the configured role of the speaker.
  22. 根据权利要求19-21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述音箱使用第一天线广播消息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 19-21, wherein the sound box uses the first antenna to broadcast a message, comprising:
    所述音箱周期性切换使用所述第一天线和所述第二天线;The sound box periodically switches to use the first antenna and the second antenna;
    所述音箱使用所述第一天线时,广播所述消息。The message is broadcast when the speaker uses the first antenna.
  23. 根据权利要求19-22中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息还包括:用于指示所述音箱被配置为从音箱的身份信息,所述身份信息还用于指示所述音箱接入第一无线局域网;所述配网信息还包括:所述第一无线局域网的第一服务集标识SSID和第一接入密码;The method according to any one of claims 19-22, wherein the configuration information further comprises: identity information used to indicate that the sound box is configured as a slave sound box, and the identity information is further used to indicate that the sound box is configured as a slave sound box. The speaker is connected to the first wireless local area network; the network distribution information further includes: the first service set identifier SSID and the first access password of the first wireless local area network;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述音箱根据所述第一SSID和所述第一接入密码,接入所述第一无线局域网,并通过所述第一无线局域网与所述N个音箱中的主音箱交互。The speaker accesses the first wireless local area network according to the first SSID and the first access password, and interacts with the main speaker among the N speakers through the first wireless local area network.
  24. 根据权利要求19-23中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息还包括:用于指示所述音箱被配置为主音箱的身份信息,所述身份信息还用于指示所述音箱作 为接入点AP提供第一无线局域网;所述配网信息还包括:所述第一无线局域网的第一SSID和第一接入密码;The method according to any one of claims 19-23, wherein the configuration information further comprises: identity information used to indicate that the sound box is configured as a main sound box, and the identity information is further used to indicate that the sound box is configured as a main sound box. The speaker provides a first wireless local area network as an access point AP; the network distribution information further includes: a first SSID and a first access password of the first wireless local area network;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述音箱作为所述AP提供所述第一无线局域网,并由所述组合音箱中的其他音箱接入所述第一无线局域网;The sound box provides the first wireless local area network as the AP, and other sound boxes in the combined sound box are connected to the first wireless local area network;
    所述音箱通过所述第一无线局域网与所述组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。The sound box interacts with other sound boxes in the combined sound box through the first wireless local area network.
  25. 根据权利要求19-23中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息还包括:用于指示所述音箱被配置为主音箱的身份信息或者所述音箱被配置为从音箱的身份信息,所述身份信息还用于指示所述音箱接入路由器提供的第二无线局域网;所述配网信息还包括:所述第二无线局域网的第二SSID和第二接入密码;The method according to any one of claims 19-23, wherein the configuration information further comprises: identity information for indicating that the speaker is configured as a master speaker or the speaker is configured as a slave speaker Identity information, the identity information is also used to instruct the speaker to access the second wireless local area network provided by the router; the network distribution information also includes: the second SSID and the second access password of the second wireless local area network;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述音箱根据所述第二SSID和所述第二接入密码,接入所述第二无线局域网,并通过所述第二无线局域网与所述组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。The sound box accesses the second wireless local area network according to the second SSID and the second access password, and interacts with other sound boxes in the combined sound box through the second wireless local area network.
  26. 根据权利要求19-25中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息还包括用于所述N个音箱交互的音箱秘钥和凭证;The method according to any one of claims 19-25, wherein the configuration information further comprises a speaker key and a credential for the interaction of the N speakers;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述音箱根据所述音箱秘钥和所述凭证与所述组合音箱中的其他音箱交互。The speaker interacts with other speakers in the combined speaker according to the speaker key and the credential.
  27. 根据权利要求19-26中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 19-26, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述音箱接收到所述加密信息后,向所述电子设备发送确认消息;或者,After receiving the encrypted information, the speaker sends a confirmation message to the electronic device; or,
    所述音箱发出提示信息后,响应于用户对所述提示信息的第三操作,向所述电子设备发送确认消息;其中,所述提示信息用于指示所述音箱被配置的角色;After the speaker sends out the prompt information, in response to the user's third operation on the prompt information, a confirmation message is sent to the electronic device; wherein the prompt information is used to indicate the configured role of the speaker;
    其中,所述确认消息用于指示所述音箱配置成功。Wherein, the confirmation message is used to indicate that the speaker configuration is successful.
  28. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备中安装有第一应用APP,所述电子设备包括:存储器、显示屏、通信模块和一个或多个处理器;所述存储器、所述显示屏、所述通信模块与所述处理器耦合;所述显示屏用于显示所述处理器生成的图像或界面,所述通信模块用于与其他设备通信,所述存储器用于存储所述电子设备中的数据;所述存储器还用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-8或9-18中任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that a first application APP is installed in the electronic device, and the electronic device includes: a memory, a display screen, a communication module and one or more processors; the memory, the display screen , the communication module is coupled with the processor; the display screen is used to display an image or interface generated by the processor, the communication module is used to communicate with other devices, and the memory is used to store the electronic device The memory is also used to store computer program code, the computer program code includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device is made to perform as claimed in claims 1-8 or The method of any one of 9-18.
  29. 一种音箱,其特征在于,所述音箱包括存储器、扬声器、通信模块和一个或多个处理器;所述通信模块包括第一天线和第二天线,所述第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,所述第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,所述第一距离小于所述第二距离;所述存储器、所述扬声器、所述通信模块与所述处理器耦合;所述扬声器用于播放音频数据,所述通信模块用于与其他设备通信,所述存储器用于存储所述音箱中的数据;所述存储器还用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述音箱执行如权利要求1-8或19-27中任一项所述的方法。A sound box, characterized in that the sound box includes a memory, a speaker, a communication module and one or more processors; the communication module includes a first antenna and a second antenna, and the emission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, the transmission distance of the second antenna is the second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance; the memory, the speaker, and the communication module are coupled with the processor; the speaker uses For playing audio data, the communication module is used to communicate with other devices, and the memory is used to store data in the sound box; the memory is also used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions. The computer instructions, when executed by the processor, cause the sound box to perform the method of any of claims 1-8 or 19-27.
  30. 一种芯片系统,其特征在于,所述芯片系统应用于包括显示屏、通信模块和存储器的电子设备;所述芯片系统包括一个或多个接口电路和一个或多个处理器;所述 接口电路和所述处理器通过线路互联;所述接口电路用于从所述存储器接收信号,并向所述处理器发送所述信号,所述信号包括所述存储器中存储的计算机指令;当所述处理器执行所述计算机指令时,所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-8或9-18中任一项所述的方法。A chip system, characterized in that, the chip system is applied to an electronic device including a display screen, a communication module and a memory; the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors; the interface circuit and the processor are interconnected through a line; the interface circuit is used for receiving a signal from the memory and sending the signal to the processor, the signal including the computer instructions stored in the memory; when the processing When the computer executes the computer instructions, the electronic device executes the method of any one of claims 1-8 or 9-18.
  31. 一种芯片系统,其特征在于,所述芯片系统应用于包括通信模块和存储器的音箱,所述通信模块包括第一天线和第二天线,所述第一天线的发射距离为第一距离,所述第二天线的发射距离为第二距离,所述第一距离小于所述第二距离;所述芯片系统包括一个或多个接口电路和一个或多个处理器;所述接口电路和所述处理器通过线路互联;所述接口电路用于从所述存储器接收信号,并向所述处理器发送所述信号,所述信号包括所述存储器中存储的计算机指令;当所述处理器执行所述计算机指令时,所述音箱执行如权利要求1-8或19-27中任一项所述的方法。A chip system, characterized in that the chip system is applied to a sound box including a communication module and a memory, the communication module includes a first antenna and a second antenna, and the transmission distance of the first antenna is the first distance, so the The transmission distance of the second antenna is a second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance; the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors; the interface circuit and the The processors are interconnected by lines; the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from the memory and send the signals to the processor, the signals including computer instructions stored in the memory; when the processor executes the When executing the computer instructions, the sound box performs the method of any one of claims 1-8 or 19-27.
  32. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在设备上运行时,使得所述设备执行如权利要求1-27中任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium, characterized by comprising computer instructions which, when executed on a device, cause the device to perform the method of any one of claims 1-27.
  33. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-27中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, when the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is caused to perform the method according to any one of claims 1-27.
PCT/CN2021/113271 2020-09-14 2021-08-18 Combined loudspeaker box configuration method, loudspeaker box, and electronic device WO2022052760A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010963117.5A CN114268896B (en) 2020-09-14 2020-09-14 Configuration method of combined sound box, sound box and electronic equipment
CN202010963117.5 2020-09-14

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022052760A1 true WO2022052760A1 (en) 2022-03-17

Family

ID=80632071

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/113271 WO2022052760A1 (en) 2020-09-14 2021-08-18 Combined loudspeaker box configuration method, loudspeaker box, and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114268896B (en)
WO (1) WO2022052760A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110230137A1 (en) * 2010-03-19 2011-09-22 Hicks Matthew R Switchable Wired-Wireless Electromagnetic Signal Communication
CN104135704A (en) * 2014-07-11 2014-11-05 黄天旭 Sound box networking method and sound box network
CN105163241A (en) * 2015-09-14 2015-12-16 小米科技有限责任公司 Audio playing method and device as well as electronic device
CN105307143A (en) * 2015-11-04 2016-02-03 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 Network connection method and wireless soundbox
CN105897691A (en) * 2016-03-24 2016-08-24 美的集团股份有限公司 Method, apparatus, and system for connection of IoT device to network
CN106998514A (en) * 2016-01-26 2017-08-01 湖南汇德电子有限公司 Intelligent multichannel collocation method and system

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU2015215978B2 (en) * 2011-12-29 2016-04-28 Sonos, Inc. Systems and methods for connecting an audio controller to a hidden audio network
US9247492B2 (en) * 2011-12-29 2016-01-26 Sonos, Inc. Systems and methods for multi-network audio control

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110230137A1 (en) * 2010-03-19 2011-09-22 Hicks Matthew R Switchable Wired-Wireless Electromagnetic Signal Communication
CN104135704A (en) * 2014-07-11 2014-11-05 黄天旭 Sound box networking method and sound box network
CN105163241A (en) * 2015-09-14 2015-12-16 小米科技有限责任公司 Audio playing method and device as well as electronic device
CN105307143A (en) * 2015-11-04 2016-02-03 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 Network connection method and wireless soundbox
CN106998514A (en) * 2016-01-26 2017-08-01 湖南汇德电子有限公司 Intelligent multichannel collocation method and system
CN105897691A (en) * 2016-03-24 2016-08-24 美的集团股份有限公司 Method, apparatus, and system for connection of IoT device to network

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114268896A (en) 2022-04-01
CN114268896B (en) 2023-04-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022057557A1 (en) Household device control method and device
US11079481B2 (en) Apparatus and method for measuring distance and location
US20140370818A1 (en) Auto-discovery and auto-configuration of media devices
JP2016164803A (en) Method for operating accessory
US9380613B2 (en) Media device configuration and ecosystem setup
CN103023866A (en) Easy sharing of wireless audio signals
WO2022057558A1 (en) Method and device for batch configuring home appliances
CN114450971A (en) External audio electronic device, electronic device and method of managing communication link
JP2018509782A (en) Mobile terminal antenna
CN104364777A (en) Protocol translating adapter
CN113853754A (en) In the bluetoothTMElectronic device and method for displaying external electronic device query list in network environment
WO2023071993A1 (en) Bluetooth pairing method, device, system, and storage medium
WO2022052760A1 (en) Combined loudspeaker box configuration method, loudspeaker box, and electronic device
US11770693B2 (en) Electronic device for setting address information and method for operating same
CN114173321B (en) Equipment communication connection establishment method and equipment communication system
WO2021129128A1 (en) Wireless charging method for mobile terminal and mobile terminal
KR20200119945A (en) An electronic device for supporting low latency DNS(domain name system) processing
WO2022057521A1 (en) Method and devices for configuring device
WO2022160977A1 (en) Conference access method and electronic device
WO2023005713A1 (en) Channel configuration method, electronic device, and system
US20240056720A1 (en) Method for outputting audio signal, and electronic device for performing same
CN113014998B (en) Audio output method, device, television and computer readable storage medium
WO2022161143A1 (en) Method for sharing contacts, mobile device, electronic device, and communication system
US20220225452A1 (en) Electronic device for transmitting data packets in bluetooth network environment, and method therefor
EP4297454A1 (en) Method and system for continuing playback of audio

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21865816

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21865816

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1